[BACK]Return to texinfo.tex CVS log [TXT][DIR] Up to [local] / OpenXM / src / asir-doc

Annotation of OpenXM/src/asir-doc/texinfo.tex, Revision 1.2

1.1       noro        1: % texinfo.tex -- TeX macros to handle Texinfo files.
                      2: %
                      3: % Load plain if necessary, i.e., if running under initex.
                      4: \expandafter\ifx\csname fmtname\endcsname\relax\input plain\fi
                      5: %
                      6: \def\texinfoversion{1999-09-25.10}
                      7: %
                      8: % Copyright (C) 1985, 86, 88, 90, 91, 92, 93, 94, 95, 96, 97, 98, 99
                      9: % Free Software Foundation, Inc.
                     10: %
                     11: % This texinfo.tex file is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
                     12: % modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as
                     13: % published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at
                     14: % your option) any later version.
                     15: %
                     16: % This texinfo.tex file is distributed in the hope that it will be
                     17: % useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty
                     18: % of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU
                     19: % General Public License for more details.
                     20: %
                     21: % You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
                     22: % along with this texinfo.tex file; see the file COPYING.  If not, write
                     23: % to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330,
                     24: % Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA.
                     25: %
                     26: % In other words, you are welcome to use, share and improve this program.
                     27: % You are forbidden to forbid anyone else to use, share and improve
                     28: % what you give them.   Help stamp out software-hoarding!
                     29: %
                     30: % Please try the latest version of texinfo.tex before submitting bug
                     31: % reports; you can get the latest version from:
                     32: %   ftp://ftp.gnu.org/gnu/texinfo.tex
                     33: %   (and all GNU mirrors, see http://www.gnu.org/order/ftp.html)
                     34: %   ftp://texinfo.org/tex/texinfo.tex
                     35: %   ftp://us.ctan.org/macros/texinfo/texinfo.tex
                     36: %   (and all CTAN mirrors, finger ctan@us.ctan.org for a list).
                     37: %   /home/gd/gnu/doc/texinfo.tex on the GNU machines.
                     38: % The texinfo.tex in any given Texinfo distribution could well be out
                     39: % of date, so if that's what you're using, please check.
                     40: % Texinfo has a small home page at http://texinfo.org/.
                     41: %
                     42: % Send bug reports to bug-texinfo@gnu.org.  Please include including a
                     43: % complete document in each bug report with which we can reproduce the
                     44: % problem.  Patches are, of course, greatly appreciated.
                     45: %
                     46: % To process a Texinfo manual with TeX, it's most reliable to use the
                     47: % texi2dvi shell script that comes with the distribution.  For a simple
                     48: % manual foo.texi, however, you can get away with this:
                     49: %   tex foo.texi
                     50: %   texindex foo.??
                     51: %   tex foo.texi
                     52: %   tex foo.texi
                     53: %   dvips foo.dvi -o # or whatever, to process the dvi file; this makes foo.ps.
                     54: % The extra runs of TeX get the cross-reference information correct.
                     55: % Sometimes one run after texindex suffices, and sometimes you need more
                     56: % than two; texi2dvi does it as many times as necessary.
                     57: %
                     58: % It is possible to adapt texinfo.tex for other languages.  You can get
                     59: % the existing language-specific files from ftp://ftp.gnu.org/gnu/texinfo/.
                     60:
                     61: \message{Loading texinfo [version \texinfoversion]:}
                     62:
                     63: % If in a .fmt file, print the version number
                     64: % and turn on active characters that we couldn't do earlier because
                     65: % they might have appeared in the input file name.
                     66: \everyjob{\message{[Texinfo version \texinfoversion]}%
                     67:   \catcode`+=\active \catcode`\_=\active}
                     68:
                     69: % Save some parts of plain tex whose names we will redefine.
                     70: \let\ptexb=\b
                     71: \let\ptexbullet=\bullet
                     72: \let\ptexc=\c
                     73: \let\ptexcomma=\,
                     74: \let\ptexdot=\.
                     75: \let\ptexdots=\dots
                     76: \let\ptexend=\end
                     77: \let\ptexequiv=\equiv
                     78: \let\ptexexclam=\!
                     79: \let\ptexi=\i
                     80: \let\ptexlbrace=\{
                     81: \let\ptexrbrace=\}
                     82: \let\ptexstar=\*
                     83: \let\ptext=\t
                     84:
                     85: % We never want plain's outer \+ definition in Texinfo.
                     86: % For @tex, we can use \tabalign.
                     87: \let\+ = \relax
                     88:
1.2     ! noro       89: % (Aug. 17, 1999 A.K.)
        !            90: % Japanese support. (pTeX is a free Japanese TeX by ASCII corp., Japan,
        !            91: % and jTeX is a free Japanese TeX by NTT corp. and T. Sakurai)
        !            92: \newif\ifjaTeX
        !            93: \newif\ifpTeX
        !            94: \ifx\kanjiskip\undefined\else
        !            95:   \pTeXtrue
        !            96:   \jaTeXtrue
        !            97: \fi
        !            98: \newif\ifjTeX
        !            99: \ifx\jkern\undefined\else
        !           100:   \jTeXtrue
        !           101:   \jaTeXtrue
        !           102: \fi
        !           103:
1.1       noro      104: \message{Basics,}
1.2     ! noro      105: \ifpTeX
        !           106: \message{ASCII-pTeX,}
        !           107: \fi
        !           108: \ifjTeX
        !           109: \message{NTT-jTeX,}
        !           110: \fi
1.1       noro      111: \chardef\other=12
                    112:
                    113: % If this character appears in an error message or help string, it
                    114: % starts a new line in the output.
                    115: \newlinechar = `^^J
                    116:
                    117: % Set up fixed words for English if not already set.
                    118: \ifx\putwordAppendix\undefined  \gdef\putwordAppendix{Appendix}\fi
                    119: \ifx\putwordChapter\undefined   \gdef\putwordChapter{Chapter}\fi
                    120: \ifx\putwordfile\undefined      \gdef\putwordfile{file}\fi
                    121: \ifx\putwordin\undefined        \gdef\putwordin{in}\fi
                    122: \ifx\putwordIndexIsEmpty\undefined     \gdef\putwordIndexIsEmpty{(Index is empty)}\fi
                    123: \ifx\putwordIndexNonexistent\undefined \gdef\putwordIndexNonexistent{(Index is nonexistent)}\fi
                    124: \ifx\putwordInfo\undefined      \gdef\putwordInfo{Info}\fi
                    125: \ifx\putwordInstanceVariableof\undefined \gdef\putwordInstanceVariableof{Instance Variable of}\fi
                    126: \ifx\putwordMethodon\undefined  \gdef\putwordMethodon{Method on}\fi
                    127: \ifx\putwordNoTitle\undefined   \gdef\putwordNoTitle{No Title}\fi
                    128: \ifx\putwordof\undefined        \gdef\putwordof{of}\fi
                    129: \ifx\putwordon\undefined        \gdef\putwordon{on}\fi
                    130: \ifx\putwordpage\undefined      \gdef\putwordpage{page}\fi
                    131: \ifx\putwordsection\undefined   \gdef\putwordsection{section}\fi
                    132: \ifx\putwordSection\undefined   \gdef\putwordSection{Section}\fi
                    133: \ifx\putwordsee\undefined       \gdef\putwordsee{see}\fi
                    134: \ifx\putwordSee\undefined       \gdef\putwordSee{See}\fi
                    135: \ifx\putwordShortTOC\undefined  \gdef\putwordShortTOC{Short Contents}\fi
                    136: \ifx\putwordTOC\undefined       \gdef\putwordTOC{Table of Contents}\fi
                    137: %
                    138: \ifx\putwordMJan\undefined \gdef\putwordMJan{January}\fi
                    139: \ifx\putwordMFeb\undefined \gdef\putwordMFeb{February}\fi
                    140: \ifx\putwordMMar\undefined \gdef\putwordMMar{March}\fi
                    141: \ifx\putwordMApr\undefined \gdef\putwordMApr{April}\fi
                    142: \ifx\putwordMMay\undefined \gdef\putwordMMay{May}\fi
                    143: \ifx\putwordMJun\undefined \gdef\putwordMJun{June}\fi
                    144: \ifx\putwordMJul\undefined \gdef\putwordMJul{July}\fi
                    145: \ifx\putwordMAug\undefined \gdef\putwordMAug{August}\fi
                    146: \ifx\putwordMSep\undefined \gdef\putwordMSep{September}\fi
                    147: \ifx\putwordMOct\undefined \gdef\putwordMOct{October}\fi
                    148: \ifx\putwordMNov\undefined \gdef\putwordMNov{November}\fi
                    149: \ifx\putwordMDec\undefined \gdef\putwordMDec{December}\fi
                    150: %
                    151: \ifx\putwordDefmac\undefined    \gdef\putwordDefmac{Macro}\fi
                    152: \ifx\putwordDefspec\undefined   \gdef\putwordDefspec{Special Form}\fi
                    153: \ifx\putwordDefvar\undefined    \gdef\putwordDefvar{Variable}\fi
                    154: \ifx\putwordDefopt\undefined    \gdef\putwordDefopt{User Option}\fi
                    155: \ifx\putwordDeftypevar\undefined\gdef\putwordDeftypevar{Variable}\fi
                    156: \ifx\putwordDeffunc\undefined   \gdef\putwordDeffunc{Function}\fi
                    157: \ifx\putwordDeftypefun\undefined\gdef\putwordDeftypefun{Function}\fi
                    158:
                    159: % Ignore a token.
                    160: %
                    161: \def\gobble#1{}
                    162:
                    163: \hyphenation{ap-pen-dix}
                    164: \hyphenation{mini-buf-fer mini-buf-fers}
                    165: \hyphenation{eshell}
                    166: \hyphenation{white-space}
                    167:
                    168: % Margin to add to right of even pages, to left of odd pages.
                    169: \newdimen \bindingoffset
                    170: \newdimen \normaloffset
                    171: \newdimen\pagewidth \newdimen\pageheight
                    172:
                    173: % Sometimes it is convenient to have everything in the transcript file
                    174: % and nothing on the terminal.  We don't just call \tracingall here,
                    175: % since that produces some useless output on the terminal.
                    176: %
                    177: \def\gloggingall{\begingroup \globaldefs = 1 \loggingall \endgroup}%
                    178: \ifx\eTeXversion\undefined
                    179: \def\loggingall{\tracingcommands2 \tracingstats2
                    180:    \tracingpages1 \tracingoutput1 \tracinglostchars1
                    181:    \tracingmacros2 \tracingparagraphs1 \tracingrestores1
                    182:    \showboxbreadth\maxdimen\showboxdepth\maxdimen
                    183: }%
                    184: \else
                    185: \def\loggingall{\tracingcommands3 \tracingstats2
                    186:    \tracingpages1 \tracingoutput1 \tracinglostchars1
                    187:    \tracingmacros2 \tracingparagraphs1 \tracingrestores1
                    188:    \tracingscantokens1 \tracingassigns1 \tracingifs1
                    189:    \tracinggroups1 \tracingnesting2
                    190:    \showboxbreadth\maxdimen\showboxdepth\maxdimen
                    191: }%
                    192: \fi
                    193:
                    194: % For @cropmarks command.
                    195: % Do @cropmarks to get crop marks.
                    196: %
                    197: \newif\ifcropmarks
                    198: \let\cropmarks = \cropmarkstrue
                    199: %
                    200: % Dimensions to add cropmarks at corners.
                    201: % Added by P. A. MacKay, 12 Nov. 1986
                    202: %
                    203: \newdimen\outerhsize \newdimen\outervsize % set by the paper size routines
                    204: \newdimen\cornerlong  \cornerlong=1pc
                    205: \newdimen\cornerthick \cornerthick=.3pt
                    206: \newdimen\topandbottommargin \topandbottommargin=.75in
                    207:
                    208: % Main output routine.
                    209: \chardef\PAGE = 255
                    210: \output = {\onepageout{\pagecontents\PAGE}}
                    211:
                    212: \newbox\headlinebox
                    213: \newbox\footlinebox
                    214:
                    215: % \onepageout takes a vbox as an argument.  Note that \pagecontents
                    216: % does insertions, but you have to call it yourself.
                    217: \def\onepageout#1{%
                    218:   \ifcropmarks \hoffset=0pt \else \hoffset=\normaloffset \fi
                    219:   %
                    220:   \ifodd\pageno  \advance\hoffset by \bindingoffset
                    221:   \else \advance\hoffset by -\bindingoffset\fi
                    222:   %
                    223:   % Do this outside of the \shipout so @code etc. will be expanded in
                    224:   % the headline as they should be, not taken literally (outputting ''code).
                    225:   \setbox\headlinebox = \vbox{\let\hsize=\pagewidth \makeheadline}%
                    226:   \setbox\footlinebox = \vbox{\let\hsize=\pagewidth \makefootline}%
                    227:   %
                    228:   {%
                    229:     % Have to do this stuff outside the \shipout because we want it to
                    230:     % take effect in \write's, yet the group defined by the \vbox ends
                    231:     % before the \shipout runs.
                    232:     %
                    233:     \escapechar = `\\     % use backslash in output files.
                    234:     \indexdummies         % don't expand commands in the output.
                    235:     \normalturnoffactive  % \ in index entries must not stay \, e.g., if
                    236:                    % the page break happens to be in the middle of an example.
                    237:     \shipout\vbox{%
                    238:       \ifcropmarks \vbox to \outervsize\bgroup
                    239:         \hsize = \outerhsize
                    240:         \vskip-\topandbottommargin
                    241:         \vtop to0pt{%
                    242:           \line{\ewtop\hfil\ewtop}%
                    243:           \nointerlineskip
                    244:           \line{%
                    245:             \vbox{\moveleft\cornerthick\nstop}%
                    246:             \hfill
                    247:             \vbox{\moveright\cornerthick\nstop}%
                    248:           }%
                    249:           \vss}%
                    250:         \vskip\topandbottommargin
                    251:         \line\bgroup
                    252:           \hfil % center the page within the outer (page) hsize.
                    253:           \ifodd\pageno\hskip\bindingoffset\fi
                    254:           \vbox\bgroup
                    255:       \fi
                    256:       %
                    257:       \unvbox\headlinebox
                    258:       \pagebody{#1}%
                    259:       \ifdim\ht\footlinebox > 0pt
                    260:         % Only leave this space if the footline is nonempty.
                    261:         % (We lessened \vsize for it in \oddfootingxxx.)
                    262:         % The \baselineskip=24pt in plain's \makefootline has no effect.
                    263:         \vskip 2\baselineskip
                    264:         \unvbox\footlinebox
                    265:       \fi
                    266:       %
                    267:       \ifpdfmakepagedest \pdfmkdest{\the\pageno} \fi
                    268:       %
                    269:       \ifcropmarks
                    270:           \egroup % end of \vbox\bgroup
                    271:         \hfil\egroup % end of (centering) \line\bgroup
                    272:         \vskip\topandbottommargin plus1fill minus1fill
                    273:         \boxmaxdepth = \cornerthick
                    274:         \vbox to0pt{\vss
                    275:           \line{%
                    276:             \vbox{\moveleft\cornerthick\nsbot}%
                    277:             \hfill
                    278:             \vbox{\moveright\cornerthick\nsbot}%
                    279:           }%
                    280:           \nointerlineskip
                    281:           \line{\ewbot\hfil\ewbot}%
                    282:         }%
                    283:       \egroup % \vbox from first cropmarks clause
                    284:       \fi
                    285:     }% end of \shipout\vbox
                    286:   }% end of group with \turnoffactive
                    287:   \advancepageno
                    288:   \ifnum\outputpenalty>-20000 \else\dosupereject\fi
                    289: }
                    290:
                    291: \newinsert\margin \dimen\margin=\maxdimen
                    292:
                    293: \def\pagebody#1{\vbox to\pageheight{\boxmaxdepth=\maxdepth #1}}
                    294: {\catcode`\@ =11
                    295: \gdef\pagecontents#1{\ifvoid\topins\else\unvbox\topins\fi
                    296: % marginal hacks, juha@viisa.uucp (Juha Takala)
                    297: \ifvoid\margin\else % marginal info is present
                    298:   \rlap{\kern\hsize\vbox to\z@{\kern1pt\box\margin \vss}}\fi
                    299: \dimen@=\dp#1 \unvbox#1
                    300: \ifvoid\footins\else\vskip\skip\footins\footnoterule \unvbox\footins\fi
                    301: \ifr@ggedbottom \kern-\dimen@ \vfil \fi}
                    302: }
                    303:
                    304: % Here are the rules for the cropmarks.  Note that they are
                    305: % offset so that the space between them is truly \outerhsize or \outervsize
                    306: % (P. A. MacKay, 12 November, 1986)
                    307: %
                    308: \def\ewtop{\vrule height\cornerthick depth0pt width\cornerlong}
                    309: \def\nstop{\vbox
                    310:   {\hrule height\cornerthick depth\cornerlong width\cornerthick}}
                    311: \def\ewbot{\vrule height0pt depth\cornerthick width\cornerlong}
                    312: \def\nsbot{\vbox
                    313:   {\hrule height\cornerlong depth\cornerthick width\cornerthick}}
                    314:
                    315: % Parse an argument, then pass it to #1.  The argument is the rest of
                    316: % the input line (except we remove a trailing comment).  #1 should be a
                    317: % macro which expects an ordinary undelimited TeX argument.
                    318: %
                    319: \def\parsearg#1{%
                    320:   \let\next = #1%
                    321:   \begingroup
                    322:     \obeylines
                    323:     \futurelet\temp\parseargx
                    324: }
                    325:
                    326: % If the next token is an obeyed space (from an @example environment or
                    327: % the like), remove it and recurse.  Otherwise, we're done.
                    328: \def\parseargx{%
                    329:   % \obeyedspace is defined far below, after the definition of \sepspaces.
                    330:   \ifx\obeyedspace\temp
                    331:     \expandafter\parseargdiscardspace
                    332:   \else
                    333:     \expandafter\parseargline
                    334:   \fi
                    335: }
                    336:
                    337: % Remove a single space (as the delimiter token to the macro call).
                    338: {\obeyspaces %
                    339:  \gdef\parseargdiscardspace {\futurelet\temp\parseargx}}
                    340:
                    341: {\obeylines %
                    342:   \gdef\parseargline#1^^M{%
                    343:     \endgroup % End of the group started in \parsearg.
                    344:     %
                    345:     % First remove any @c comment, then any @comment.
                    346:     % Result of each macro is put in \toks0.
                    347:     \argremovec #1\c\relax %
                    348:     \expandafter\argremovecomment \the\toks0 \comment\relax %
                    349:     %
                    350:     % Call the caller's macro, saved as \next in \parsearg.
                    351:     \expandafter\next\expandafter{\the\toks0}%
                    352:   }%
                    353: }
                    354:
                    355: % Since all \c{,omment} does is throw away the argument, we can let TeX
                    356: % do that for us.  The \relax here is matched by the \relax in the call
                    357: % in \parseargline; it could be more or less anything, its purpose is
                    358: % just to delimit the argument to the \c.
                    359: \def\argremovec#1\c#2\relax{\toks0 = {#1}}
                    360: \def\argremovecomment#1\comment#2\relax{\toks0 = {#1}}
                    361:
                    362: % \argremovec{,omment} might leave us with trailing spaces, though; e.g.,
                    363: %    @end itemize  @c foo
                    364: % will have two active spaces as part of the argument with the
                    365: % `itemize'.  Here we remove all active spaces from #1, and assign the
                    366: % result to \toks0.
                    367: %
                    368: % This loses if there are any *other* active characters besides spaces
                    369: % in the argument -- _ ^ +, for example -- since they get expanded.
                    370: % Fortunately, Texinfo does not define any such commands.  (If it ever
                    371: % does, the catcode of the characters in questionwill have to be changed
                    372: % here.)  But this means we cannot call \removeactivespaces as part of
                    373: % \argremovec{,omment}, since @c uses \parsearg, and thus the argument
                    374: % that \parsearg gets might well have any character at all in it.
                    375: %
                    376: \def\removeactivespaces#1{%
                    377:   \begingroup
                    378:     \ignoreactivespaces
                    379:     \edef\temp{#1}%
                    380:     \global\toks0 = \expandafter{\temp}%
                    381:   \endgroup
                    382: }
                    383:
                    384: % Change the active space to expand to nothing.
                    385: %
                    386: \begingroup
                    387:   \obeyspaces
                    388:   \gdef\ignoreactivespaces{\obeyspaces\let =\empty}
                    389: \endgroup
                    390:
                    391:
                    392: \def\flushcr{\ifx\par\lisppar \def\next##1{}\else \let\next=\relax \fi \next}
                    393:
                    394: %% These are used to keep @begin/@end levels from running away
                    395: %% Call \inENV within environments (after a \begingroup)
                    396: \newif\ifENV \ENVfalse \def\inENV{\ifENV\relax\else\ENVtrue\fi}
                    397: \def\ENVcheck{%
                    398: \ifENV\errmessage{Still within an environment; press RETURN to continue}
                    399: \endgroup\fi} % This is not perfect, but it should reduce lossage
                    400:
                    401: % @begin foo  is the same as @foo, for now.
                    402: \newhelp\EMsimple{Press RETURN to continue.}
                    403:
                    404: \outer\def\begin{\parsearg\beginxxx}
                    405:
                    406: \def\beginxxx #1{%
                    407: \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\relax
                    408: {\errhelp=\EMsimple \errmessage{Undefined command @begin #1}}\else
                    409: \csname #1\endcsname\fi}
                    410:
                    411: % @end foo executes the definition of \Efoo.
                    412: %
                    413: \def\end{\parsearg\endxxx}
                    414: \def\endxxx #1{%
                    415:   \removeactivespaces{#1}%
                    416:   \edef\endthing{\the\toks0}%
                    417:   %
                    418:   \expandafter\ifx\csname E\endthing\endcsname\relax
                    419:     \expandafter\ifx\csname \endthing\endcsname\relax
                    420:       % There's no \foo, i.e., no ``environment'' foo.
                    421:       \errhelp = \EMsimple
                    422:       \errmessage{Undefined command `@end \endthing'}%
                    423:     \else
                    424:       \unmatchedenderror\endthing
                    425:     \fi
                    426:   \else
                    427:     % Everything's ok; the right environment has been started.
                    428:     \csname E\endthing\endcsname
                    429:   \fi
                    430: }
                    431:
                    432: % There is an environment #1, but it hasn't been started.  Give an error.
                    433: %
                    434: \def\unmatchedenderror#1{%
                    435:   \errhelp = \EMsimple
                    436:   \errmessage{This `@end #1' doesn't have a matching `@#1'}%
                    437: }
                    438:
                    439: % Define the control sequence \E#1 to give an unmatched @end error.
                    440: %
                    441: \def\defineunmatchedend#1{%
                    442:   \expandafter\def\csname E#1\endcsname{\unmatchedenderror{#1}}%
                    443: }
                    444:
                    445:
                    446: % Single-spacing is done by various environments (specifically, in
                    447: % \nonfillstart and \quotations).
                    448: \newskip\singlespaceskip \singlespaceskip = 12.5pt
                    449: \def\singlespace{%
                    450:   % Why was this kern here?  It messes up equalizing space above and below
                    451:   % environments.  --karl, 6may93
                    452:   %{\advance \baselineskip by -\singlespaceskip
                    453:   %\kern \baselineskip}%
                    454:   \setleading \singlespaceskip
                    455: }
                    456:
                    457: %% Simple single-character @ commands
                    458:
                    459: % @@ prints an @
                    460: % Kludge this until the fonts are right (grr).
                    461: \def\@{{\tt\char64}}
                    462:
                    463: % This is turned off because it was never documented
                    464: % and you can use @w{...} around a quote to suppress ligatures.
                    465: %% Define @` and @' to be the same as ` and '
                    466: %% but suppressing ligatures.
                    467: %\def\`{{`}}
                    468: %\def\'{{'}}
                    469:
                    470: % Used to generate quoted braces.
                    471: \def\mylbrace {{\tt\char123}}
                    472: \def\myrbrace {{\tt\char125}}
                    473: \let\{=\mylbrace
                    474: \let\}=\myrbrace
                    475: \begingroup
                    476:   % Definitions to produce actual \{ & \} command in an index.
                    477:   \catcode`\{ = 12 \catcode`\} = 12
                    478:   \catcode`\[ = 1 \catcode`\] = 2
                    479:   \catcode`\@ = 0 \catcode`\\ = 12
                    480:   @gdef@lbracecmd[\{]%
                    481:   @gdef@rbracecmd[\}]%
                    482: @endgroup
                    483:
                    484: % Accents: @, @dotaccent @ringaccent @ubaraccent @udotaccent
                    485: % Others are defined by plain TeX: @` @' @" @^ @~ @= @v @H.
                    486: \let\, = \c
                    487: \let\dotaccent = \.
                    488: \def\ringaccent#1{{\accent23 #1}}
                    489: \let\tieaccent = \t
                    490: \let\ubaraccent = \b
                    491: \let\udotaccent = \d
                    492:
                    493: % Other special characters: @questiondown @exclamdown
                    494: % Plain TeX defines: @AA @AE @O @OE @L (and lowercase versions) @ss.
                    495: \def\questiondown{?`}
                    496: \def\exclamdown{!`}
                    497:
                    498: % Dotless i and dotless j, used for accents.
                    499: \def\imacro{i}
                    500: \def\jmacro{j}
                    501: \def\dotless#1{%
                    502:   \def\temp{#1}%
                    503:   \ifx\temp\imacro \ptexi
                    504:   \else\ifx\temp\jmacro \j
                    505:   \else \errmessage{@dotless can be used only with i or j}%
                    506:   \fi\fi
                    507: }
                    508:
                    509: % Be sure we're in horizontal mode when doing a tie, since we make space
                    510: % equivalent to this in @example-like environments. Otherwise, a space
                    511: % at the beginning of a line will start with \penalty -- and
                    512: % since \penalty is valid in vertical mode, we'd end up putting the
                    513: % penalty on the vertical list instead of in the new paragraph.
                    514: {\catcode`@ = 11
                    515:  % Avoid using \@M directly, because that causes trouble
                    516:  % if the definition is written into an index file.
                    517:  \global\let\tiepenalty = \@M
                    518:  \gdef\tie{\leavevmode\penalty\tiepenalty\ }
                    519: }
                    520:
                    521: % @: forces normal size whitespace following.
                    522: \def\:{\spacefactor=1000 }
                    523:
                    524: % @* forces a line break.
                    525: \def\*{\hfil\break\hbox{}\ignorespaces}
                    526:
                    527: % @. is an end-of-sentence period.
                    528: \def\.{.\spacefactor=3000 }
                    529:
                    530: % @! is an end-of-sentence bang.
                    531: \def\!{!\spacefactor=3000 }
                    532:
                    533: % @? is an end-of-sentence query.
                    534: \def\?{?\spacefactor=3000 }
                    535:
                    536: % @w prevents a word break.  Without the \leavevmode, @w at the
                    537: % beginning of a paragraph, when TeX is still in vertical mode, would
                    538: % produce a whole line of output instead of starting the paragraph.
                    539: \def\w#1{\leavevmode\hbox{#1}}
                    540:
                    541: % @group ... @end group forces ... to be all on one page, by enclosing
                    542: % it in a TeX vbox.  We use \vtop instead of \vbox to construct the box
                    543: % to keep its height that of a normal line.  According to the rules for
                    544: % \topskip (p.114 of the TeXbook), the glue inserted is
                    545: % max (\topskip - \ht (first item), 0).  If that height is large,
                    546: % therefore, no glue is inserted, and the space between the headline and
                    547: % the text is small, which looks bad.
                    548: %
                    549: \def\group{\begingroup
                    550:   \ifnum\catcode13=\active \else
                    551:     \errhelp = \groupinvalidhelp
                    552:     \errmessage{@group invalid in context where filling is enabled}%
                    553:   \fi
                    554:   %
                    555:   % The \vtop we start below produces a box with normal height and large
                    556:   % depth; thus, TeX puts \baselineskip glue before it, and (when the
                    557:   % next line of text is done) \lineskip glue after it.  (See p.82 of
                    558:   % the TeXbook.)  Thus, space below is not quite equal to space
                    559:   % above.  But it's pretty close.
                    560:   \def\Egroup{%
                    561:     \egroup           % End the \vtop.
                    562:     \endgroup         % End the \group.
                    563:   }%
                    564:   %
                    565:   \vtop\bgroup
                    566:     % We have to put a strut on the last line in case the @group is in
                    567:     % the midst of an example, rather than completely enclosing it.
                    568:     % Otherwise, the interline space between the last line of the group
                    569:     % and the first line afterwards is too small.  But we can't put the
                    570:     % strut in \Egroup, since there it would be on a line by itself.
                    571:     % Hence this just inserts a strut at the beginning of each line.
                    572:     \everypar = {\strut}%
                    573:     %
                    574:     % Since we have a strut on every line, we don't need any of TeX's
                    575:     % normal interline spacing.
                    576:     \offinterlineskip
                    577:     %
                    578:     % OK, but now we have to do something about blank
                    579:     % lines in the input in @example-like environments, which normally
                    580:     % just turn into \lisppar, which will insert no space now that we've
                    581:     % turned off the interline space.  Simplest is to make them be an
                    582:     % empty paragraph.
                    583:     \ifx\par\lisppar
                    584:       \edef\par{\leavevmode \par}%
                    585:       %
                    586:       % Reset ^^M's definition to new definition of \par.
                    587:       \obeylines
                    588:     \fi
                    589:     %
                    590:     % Do @comment since we are called inside an environment such as
                    591:     % @example, where each end-of-line in the input causes an
                    592:     % end-of-line in the output.  We don't want the end-of-line after
                    593:     % the `@group' to put extra space in the output.  Since @group
                    594:     % should appear on a line by itself (according to the Texinfo
                    595:     % manual), we don't worry about eating any user text.
                    596:     \comment
                    597: }
                    598: %
                    599: % TeX puts in an \escapechar (i.e., `@') at the beginning of the help
                    600: % message, so this ends up printing `@group can only ...'.
                    601: %
                    602: \newhelp\groupinvalidhelp{%
                    603: group can only be used in environments such as @example,^^J%
                    604: where each line of input produces a line of output.}
                    605:
                    606: % @need space-in-mils
                    607: % forces a page break if there is not space-in-mils remaining.
                    608:
                    609: \newdimen\mil  \mil=0.001in
                    610:
                    611: \def\need{\parsearg\needx}
                    612:
                    613: % Old definition--didn't work.
                    614: %\def\needx #1{\par %
                    615: %% This method tries to make TeX break the page naturally
                    616: %% if the depth of the box does not fit.
                    617: %{\baselineskip=0pt%
                    618: %\vtop to #1\mil{\vfil}\kern -#1\mil\nobreak
                    619: %\prevdepth=-1000pt
                    620: %}}
                    621:
                    622: \def\needx#1{%
                    623:   % Ensure vertical mode, so we don't make a big box in the middle of a
                    624:   % paragraph.
                    625:   \par
                    626:   %
                    627:   % If the @need value is less than one line space, it's useless.
                    628:   \dimen0 = #1\mil
                    629:   \dimen2 = \ht\strutbox
                    630:   \advance\dimen2 by \dp\strutbox
                    631:   \ifdim\dimen0 > \dimen2
                    632:     %
                    633:     % Do a \strut just to make the height of this box be normal, so the
                    634:     % normal leading is inserted relative to the preceding line.
                    635:     % And a page break here is fine.
                    636:     \vtop to #1\mil{\strut\vfil}%
                    637:     %
                    638:     % TeX does not even consider page breaks if a penalty added to the
                    639:     % main vertical list is 10000 or more.  But in order to see if the
                    640:     % empty box we just added fits on the page, we must make it consider
                    641:     % page breaks.  On the other hand, we don't want to actually break the
                    642:     % page after the empty box.  So we use a penalty of 9999.
                    643:     %
                    644:     % There is an extremely small chance that TeX will actually break the
                    645:     % page at this \penalty, if there are no other feasible breakpoints in
                    646:     % sight.  (If the user is using lots of big @group commands, which
                    647:     % almost-but-not-quite fill up a page, TeX will have a hard time doing
                    648:     % good page breaking, for example.)  However, I could not construct an
                    649:     % example where a page broke at this \penalty; if it happens in a real
                    650:     % document, then we can reconsider our strategy.
                    651:     \penalty9999
                    652:     %
                    653:     % Back up by the size of the box, whether we did a page break or not.
                    654:     \kern -#1\mil
                    655:     %
                    656:     % Do not allow a page break right after this kern.
                    657:     \nobreak
                    658:   \fi
                    659: }
                    660:
                    661: % @br   forces paragraph break
                    662:
                    663: \let\br = \par
                    664:
                    665: % @dots{} output an ellipsis using the current font.
                    666: % We do .5em per period so that it has the same spacing in a typewriter
                    667: % font as three actual period characters.
                    668: %
                    669: \def\dots{%
                    670:   \leavevmode
                    671:   \hbox to 1.5em{%
                    672:     \hskip 0pt plus 0.25fil minus 0.25fil
                    673:     .\hss.\hss.%
                    674:     \hskip 0pt plus 0.5fil minus 0.5fil
                    675:   }%
                    676: }
                    677:
                    678: % @enddots{} is an end-of-sentence ellipsis.
                    679: %
                    680: \def\enddots{%
                    681:   \leavevmode
                    682:   \hbox to 2em{%
                    683:     \hskip 0pt plus 0.25fil minus 0.25fil
                    684:     .\hss.\hss.\hss.%
                    685:     \hskip 0pt plus 0.5fil minus 0.5fil
                    686:   }%
                    687:   \spacefactor=3000
                    688: }
                    689:
                    690:
                    691: % @page    forces the start of a new page
                    692: %
                    693: \def\page{\par\vfill\supereject}
                    694:
                    695: % @exdent text....
                    696: % outputs text on separate line in roman font, starting at standard page margin
                    697:
                    698: % This records the amount of indent in the innermost environment.
                    699: % That's how much \exdent should take out.
                    700: \newskip\exdentamount
                    701:
                    702: % This defn is used inside fill environments such as @defun.
                    703: \def\exdent{\parsearg\exdentyyy}
                    704: \def\exdentyyy #1{{\hfil\break\hbox{\kern -\exdentamount{\rm#1}}\hfil\break}}
                    705:
                    706: % This defn is used inside nofill environments such as @example.
                    707: \def\nofillexdent{\parsearg\nofillexdentyyy}
                    708: \def\nofillexdentyyy #1{{\advance \leftskip by -\exdentamount
                    709: \leftline{\hskip\leftskip{\rm#1}}}}
                    710:
                    711: % @inmargin{TEXT} puts TEXT in the margin next to the current paragraph.
                    712:
                    713: \def\inmargin#1{%
                    714: \strut\vadjust{\nobreak\kern-\strutdepth
                    715:   \vtop to \strutdepth{\baselineskip\strutdepth\vss
                    716:   \llap{\rightskip=\inmarginspacing \vbox{\noindent #1}}\null}}}
                    717: \newskip\inmarginspacing \inmarginspacing=1cm
                    718: \def\strutdepth{\dp\strutbox}
                    719:
                    720: %\hbox{{\rm#1}}\hfil\break}}
                    721:
                    722: % @include file    insert text of that file as input.
                    723: % Allow normal characters that  we make active in the argument (a file name).
                    724: \def\include{\begingroup
                    725:   \catcode`\\=12
                    726:   \catcode`~=12
                    727:   \catcode`^=12
                    728:   \catcode`_=12
                    729:   \catcode`|=12
                    730:   \catcode`<=12
                    731:   \catcode`>=12
                    732:   \catcode`+=12
                    733:   \parsearg\includezzz}
                    734: % Restore active chars for included file.
                    735: \def\includezzz#1{\endgroup\begingroup
                    736:   % Read the included file in a group so nested @include's work.
                    737:   \def\thisfile{#1}%
                    738:   \input\thisfile
                    739: \endgroup}
                    740:
                    741: \def\thisfile{}
                    742:
                    743: % @center line   outputs that line, centered
                    744:
                    745: \def\center{\parsearg\centerzzz}
                    746: \def\centerzzz #1{{\advance\hsize by -\leftskip
                    747: \advance\hsize by -\rightskip
                    748: \centerline{#1}}}
                    749:
                    750: % @sp n   outputs n lines of vertical space
                    751:
                    752: \def\sp{\parsearg\spxxx}
                    753: \def\spxxx #1{\vskip #1\baselineskip}
                    754:
                    755: % @comment ...line which is ignored...
                    756: % @c is the same as @comment
                    757: % @ignore ... @end ignore  is another way to write a comment
                    758:
                    759: \def\comment{\begingroup \catcode`\^^M=\other%
                    760: \catcode`\@=\other \catcode`\{=\other \catcode`\}=\other%
                    761: \commentxxx}
                    762: {\catcode`\^^M=\other \gdef\commentxxx#1^^M{\endgroup}}
                    763:
                    764: \let\c=\comment
                    765:
                    766: % @paragraphindent NCHARS
                    767: % We'll use ems for NCHARS, close enough.
                    768: % We cannot implement @paragraphindent asis, though.
                    769: %
                    770: \def\asisword{asis} % no translation, these are keywords
                    771: \def\noneword{none}
                    772: %
                    773: \def\paragraphindent{\parsearg\doparagraphindent}
                    774: \def\doparagraphindent#1{%
                    775:   \def\temp{#1}%
                    776:   \ifx\temp\asisword
                    777:   \else
                    778:     \ifx\temp\noneword
                    779:       \defaultparindent = 0pt
                    780:     \else
                    781:       \defaultparindent = #1em
                    782:     \fi
                    783:   \fi
                    784:   \parindent = \defaultparindent
                    785: }
                    786:
                    787: % @exampleindent NCHARS
                    788: % We'll use ems for NCHARS like @paragraphindent.
                    789: % It seems @exampleindent asis isn't necessary, but
                    790: % I preserve it to make it similar to @paragraphindent.
                    791: \def\exampleindent{\parsearg\doexampleindent}
                    792: \def\doexampleindent#1{%
                    793:   \def\temp{#1}%
                    794:   \ifx\temp\asisword
                    795:   \else
                    796:     \ifx\temp\noneword
                    797:       \lispnarrowing = 0pt
                    798:     \else
                    799:       \lispnarrowing = #1em
                    800:     \fi
                    801:   \fi
                    802: }
                    803:
                    804: % @asis just yields its argument.  Used with @table, for example.
                    805: %
                    806: \def\asis#1{#1}
                    807:
                    808: % @math means output in math mode.
                    809: % We don't use $'s directly in the definition of \math because control
                    810: % sequences like \math are expanded when the toc file is written.  Then,
                    811: % we read the toc file back, the $'s will be normal characters (as they
                    812: % should be, according to the definition of Texinfo).  So we must use a
                    813: % control sequence to switch into and out of math mode.
                    814: %
                    815: % This isn't quite enough for @math to work properly in indices, but it
                    816: % seems unlikely it will ever be needed there.
                    817: %
                    818: \let\implicitmath = $
                    819: \def\math#1{\implicitmath #1\implicitmath}
                    820:
                    821: % @bullet and @minus need the same treatment as @math, just above.
                    822: \def\bullet{\implicitmath\ptexbullet\implicitmath}
                    823: \def\minus{\implicitmath-\implicitmath}
                    824:
                    825: % @refill is a no-op.
                    826: \let\refill=\relax
                    827:
                    828: % If working on a large document in chapters, it is convenient to
                    829: % be able to disable indexing, cross-referencing, and contents, for test runs.
                    830: % This is done with @novalidate (before @setfilename).
                    831: %
                    832: \newif\iflinks \linkstrue % by default we want the aux files.
                    833: \let\novalidate = \linksfalse
                    834:
                    835: % @setfilename is done at the beginning of every texinfo file.
                    836: % So open here the files we need to have open while reading the input.
                    837: % This makes it possible to make a .fmt file for texinfo.
                    838: \def\setfilename{%
                    839:    \iflinks
                    840:      \readauxfile
                    841:    \fi % \openindices needs to do some work in any case.
                    842:    \openindices
                    843:    \fixbackslash  % Turn off hack to swallow `\input texinfo'.
                    844:    \global\let\setfilename=\comment % Ignore extra @setfilename cmds.
                    845:    %
                    846:    % If texinfo.cnf is present on the system, read it.
                    847:    % Useful for site-wide @afourpaper, etc.
                    848:    % Just to be on the safe side, close the input stream before the \input.
                    849:    \openin 1 texinfo.cnf
                    850:    \ifeof1 \let\temp=\relax \else \def\temp{\input texinfo.cnf }\fi
                    851:    \closein1
                    852:    \temp
                    853:    %
                    854:    \comment % Ignore the actual filename.
                    855: }
                    856:
                    857: % Called from \setfilename.
                    858: %
                    859: \def\openindices{%
                    860:   \newindex{cp}%
                    861:   \newcodeindex{fn}%
                    862:   \newcodeindex{vr}%
                    863:   \newcodeindex{tp}%
                    864:   \newcodeindex{ky}%
                    865:   \newcodeindex{pg}%
                    866: }
                    867:
                    868: % @bye.
                    869: \outer\def\bye{\pagealignmacro\tracingstats=1\ptexend}
                    870:
                    871:
                    872: \message{pdf,}
                    873: % adobe `portable' document format
                    874: \newcount\tempnum
                    875: \newcount\lnkcount
                    876: \newtoks\filename
                    877: \newcount\filenamelength
                    878: \newcount\pgn
                    879: \newtoks\toksA
                    880: \newtoks\toksB
                    881: \newtoks\toksC
                    882: \newtoks\toksD
                    883: \newbox\boxA
                    884: \newcount\countA
                    885: \newif\ifpdf
                    886: \newif\ifpdfmakepagedest
                    887:
                    888: \ifx\pdfoutput\undefined
                    889:   \pdffalse
                    890:   \let\pdfmkdest = \gobble
                    891:   \let\pdfurl = \gobble
                    892:   \let\endlink = \relax
                    893:   \let\linkcolor = \relax
                    894:   \let\pdfmakeoutlines = \relax
                    895: \else
                    896:   \pdftrue
                    897:   \pdfoutput = 1
                    898:   \input pdfcolor
                    899:   \def\dopdfimage#1#2#3{%
                    900:     \def\imagewidth{#2}%
                    901:     \def\imageheight{#3}%
                    902:     \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14
                    903:       \pdfimage
                    904:     \else
                    905:       \pdfximage
                    906:     \fi
                    907:       \ifx\empty\imagewidth\else width \imagewidth \fi
                    908:       \ifx\empty\imageheight\else height \imageheight \fi
                    909:       {#1.pdf}%
                    910:     \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14 \else
                    911:       \pdfrefximage \pdflastximage
                    912:     \fi}
                    913:   \def\pdfmkdest#1{\pdfdest name{#1@} xyz}
                    914:   \def\pdfmkpgn#1{#1@}
1.2     ! noro      915: %   \let\linkcolor = \Cyan
        !           916:   \let\linkcolor = \Green
1.1       noro      917:   \def\endlink{\Black\pdfendlink}
                    918:   % Adding outlines to PDF; macros for calculating structure of outlines
                    919:   % come from Petr Olsak
                    920:   \def\expnumber#1{\expandafter\ifx\csname#1\endcsname\relax 0%
                    921:     \else \csname#1\endcsname \fi}
                    922:   \def\advancenumber#1{\tempnum=\expnumber{#1}\relax
                    923:     \advance\tempnum by1
                    924:     \expandafter\xdef\csname#1\endcsname{\the\tempnum}}
                    925:   \def\pdfmakeoutlines{{%
                    926:     \openin 1 \jobname.toc
                    927:     \ifeof 1\else\bgroup
                    928:       \closein 1
                    929:       \indexnofonts
                    930:       \def\tt{}
                    931:       % thanh's hack / proper braces in bookmarks
                    932:       \edef\mylbrace{\iftrue \string{\else}\fi}\let\{=\mylbrace
                    933:       \edef\myrbrace{\iffalse{\else\string}\fi}\let\}=\myrbrace
                    934:       %
                    935:       \def\chapentry ##1##2##3{}
                    936:       \def\unnumbchapentry ##1##2{}
                    937:       \def\secentry ##1##2##3##4{\advancenumber{chap##2}}
                    938:       \def\unnumbsecentry ##1##2{}
                    939:       \def\subsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5{\advancenumber{sec##2.##3}}
                    940:       \def\unnumbsubsecentry ##1##2{}
                    941:       \def\subsubsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5##6{\advancenumber{subsec##2.##3.##4}}
                    942:       \def\unnumbsubsubsecentry ##1##2{}
                    943:       \input \jobname.toc
                    944:       \def\chapentry ##1##2##3{%
                    945:         \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{##3}}count-\expnumber{chap##2}{##1}}
                    946:       \def\unnumbchapentry ##1##2{%
                    947:         \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{##2}}{##1}}
                    948:       \def\secentry ##1##2##3##4{%
                    949:         \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{##4}}count-\expnumber{sec##2.##3}{##1}}
                    950:       \def\unnumbsecentry ##1##2{%
                    951:         \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{##2}}{##1}}
                    952:       \def\subsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5{%
                    953:         \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{##5}}count-\expnumber{subsec##2.##3.##4}{##1}}
                    954:       \def\unnumbsubsecentry ##1##2{%
                    955:         \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{##2}}{##1}}
                    956:       \def\subsubsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5##6{%
                    957:         \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{##6}}{##1}}
                    958:       \def\unnumbsubsubsecentry ##1##2{%
                    959:         \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{##2}}{##1}}
                    960:       \input \jobname.toc
                    961:     \egroup\fi
                    962:   }}
                    963:   \def\makelinks #1,{%
                    964:     \def\params{#1}\def\E{END}%
                    965:     \ifx\params\E
                    966:       \let\nextmakelinks=\relax
                    967:     \else
                    968:       \let\nextmakelinks=\makelinks
                    969:       \ifnum\lnkcount>0,\fi
                    970:       \picknum{#1}%
                    971:       \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}
                    972:         goto name{\pdfmkpgn{\the\pgn}}%
                    973:       \linkcolor #1%
                    974:       \advance\lnkcount by 1%
                    975:       \endlink
                    976:     \fi
                    977:     \nextmakelinks
                    978:   }
                    979:   \def\picknum#1{\expandafter\pn#1}
                    980:   \def\pn#1{%
                    981:     \def\p{#1}%
                    982:     \ifx\p\lbrace
                    983:       \let\nextpn=\ppn
                    984:     \else
                    985:       \let\nextpn=\ppnn
                    986:       \def\first{#1}
                    987:     \fi
                    988:     \nextpn
                    989:   }
                    990:   \def\ppn#1{\pgn=#1\gobble}
                    991:   \def\ppnn{\pgn=\first}
                    992:   \def\pdfmklnk#1{\lnkcount=0\makelinks #1,END,}
                    993:   \def\addtokens#1#2{\edef\addtoks{\noexpand#1={\the#1#2}}\addtoks}
                    994:   \def\skipspaces#1{\def\PP{#1}\def\D{|}%
                    995:     \ifx\PP\D\let\nextsp\relax
                    996:     \else\let\nextsp\skipspaces
                    997:       \ifx\p\space\else\addtokens{\filename}{\PP}%
                    998:         \advance\filenamelength by 1
                    999:       \fi
                   1000:     \fi
                   1001:     \nextsp}
                   1002:   \def\getfilename#1{\filenamelength=0\expandafter\skipspaces#1|\relax}
                   1003:   \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14
                   1004:     \let \startlink \pdfannotlink
                   1005:   \else
                   1006:     \let \startlink \pdfstartlink
                   1007:   \fi
                   1008:   \def\pdfurl#1{%
                   1009:     \begingroup
                   1010:       \normalturnoffactive\def\@{@}%
                   1011:       \leavevmode\Red
                   1012:       \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}%
                   1013:         user{/Subtype /Link /A << /S /URI /URI (#1) >>}%
                   1014:         % #1
                   1015:     \endgroup}
                   1016:   \def\pdfgettoks#1.{\setbox\boxA=\hbox{\toksA={#1.}\toksB={}\maketoks}}
                   1017:   \def\addtokens#1#2{\edef\addtoks{\noexpand#1={\the#1#2}}\addtoks}
                   1018:   \def\adn#1{\addtokens{\toksC}{#1}\global\countA=1\let\next=\maketoks}
                   1019:   \def\poptoks#1#2|ENDTOKS|{\let\first=#1\toksD={#1}\toksA={#2}}
                   1020:   \def\maketoks{%
                   1021:     \expandafter\poptoks\the\toksA|ENDTOKS|
                   1022:     \ifx\first0\adn0
                   1023:     \else\ifx\first1\adn1 \else\ifx\first2\adn2 \else\ifx\first3\adn3
                   1024:     \else\ifx\first4\adn4 \else\ifx\first5\adn5 \else\ifx\first6\adn6
                   1025:     \else\ifx\first7\adn7 \else\ifx\first8\adn8 \else\ifx\first9\adn9
                   1026:     \else
                   1027:       \ifnum0=\countA\else\makelink\fi
                   1028:       \ifx\first.\let\next=\done\else
                   1029:         \let\next=\maketoks
                   1030:         \addtokens{\toksB}{\the\toksD}
                   1031:         \ifx\first,\addtokens{\toksB}{\space}\fi
                   1032:       \fi
                   1033:     \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
                   1034:     \next}
                   1035:   \def\makelink{\addtokens{\toksB}%
                   1036:     {\noexpand\pdflink{\the\toksC}}\toksC={}\global\countA=0}
                   1037:   \def\pdflink#1{%
                   1038:     \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]} goto name{\mkpgn{#1}}
                   1039:     \linkcolor #1\endlink}
                   1040:   \def\mkpgn#1{#1@}
                   1041:   \def\done{\edef\st{\global\noexpand\toksA={\the\toksB}}\st}
                   1042: \fi % \ifx\pdfoutput
                   1043:
                   1044:
                   1045: \message{fonts,}
                   1046: % Font-change commands.
                   1047:
1.2     ! noro     1048: % Japanese fonts.
        !          1049: \newfam\mcfam
        !          1050: \newfam\gtfam
        !          1051: \ifjaTeX
        !          1052: \catcode`\@ =11
        !          1053: \def\mc{\fam\mcfam \tenmin}
        !          1054: \def\gt{\fam\gtfam \tengt}
        !          1055: \def\rm{\mc \fam\z@ \tenrm}
        !          1056: \def\bf{\gt \fam\bffam \tenbf}
        !          1057: \catcode`\@ =12
        !          1058: \fi
        !          1059:
1.1       noro     1060: % Texinfo sort of supports the sans serif font style, which plain TeX does not.
                   1061: % So we set up a \sf analogous to plain's \rm, etc.
                   1062: \newfam\sffam
1.2     ! noro     1063: \ifjaTeX
        !          1064: \def\sf{\gt \fam\sffam \tensf}
        !          1065: \else
1.1       noro     1066: \def\sf{\fam=\sffam \tensf}
1.2     ! noro     1067: \fi
1.1       noro     1068: \let\li = \sf % Sometimes we call it \li, not \sf.
                   1069:
                   1070: % We don't need math for this one.
                   1071: \def\ttsl{\tenttsl}
                   1072:
                   1073: % Use Computer Modern fonts at \magstephalf (11pt).
                   1074: \newcount\mainmagstep
                   1075: \mainmagstep=\magstephalf
                   1076:
                   1077: % Set the font macro #1 to the font named #2, adding on the
                   1078: % specified font prefix (normally `cm').
                   1079: % #3 is the font's design size, #4 is a scale factor
                   1080: \def\setfont#1#2#3#4{\font#1=\fontprefix#2#3 scaled #4}
                   1081:
                   1082: % Use cm as the default font prefix.
                   1083: % To specify the font prefix, you must define \fontprefix
                   1084: % before you read in texinfo.tex.
                   1085: \ifx\fontprefix\undefined
                   1086: \def\fontprefix{cm}
                   1087: \fi
                   1088: % Support font families that don't use the same naming scheme as CM.
                   1089: \def\rmshape{r}
                   1090: \def\rmbshape{bx}               %where the normal face is bold
                   1091: \def\bfshape{b}
                   1092: \def\bxshape{bx}
                   1093: \def\ttshape{tt}
                   1094: \def\ttbshape{tt}
                   1095: \def\ttslshape{sltt}
                   1096: \def\itshape{ti}
                   1097: \def\itbshape{bxti}
                   1098: \def\slshape{sl}
                   1099: \def\slbshape{bxsl}
                   1100: \def\sfshape{ss}
                   1101: \def\sfbshape{ss}
                   1102: \def\scshape{csc}
                   1103: \def\scbshape{csc}
                   1104:
                   1105: \ifx\bigger\relax
                   1106: \let\mainmagstep=\magstep1
                   1107: \setfont\textrm\rmshape{12}{1000}
                   1108: \setfont\texttt\ttshape{12}{1000}
1.2     ! noro     1109: \ifpTeX
        !          1110: \font\textmc=min10 scaled 1200
        !          1111: \font\textgt=goth10 scaled 1200
        !          1112: \fi
        !          1113: \ifjTeX
        !          1114: \jfont\textmc=dm12
        !          1115: \jfont\textgt=dg12
        !          1116: \fi
1.1       noro     1117: \else
                   1118: \setfont\textrm\rmshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
                   1119: \setfont\texttt\ttshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
1.2     ! noro     1120: \ifpTeX
        !          1121: \font\textmc=min10 scaled \magstephalf
        !          1122: \font\textgt=goth10 scaled \magstephalf
        !          1123: \fi
        !          1124: \ifjTeX
        !          1125: \jfont\textmc=dm10 scaled \magstephalf
        !          1126: \jfont\textgt=dg10 scaled \magstephalf
        !          1127: \fi
1.1       noro     1128: \fi
                   1129: % Instead of cmb10, you many want to use cmbx10.
                   1130: % cmbx10 is a prettier font on its own, but cmb10
                   1131: % looks better when embedded in a line with cmr10.
                   1132: \setfont\textbf\bfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
                   1133: \setfont\textit\itshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
                   1134: \setfont\textsl\slshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
                   1135: \setfont\textsf\sfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
                   1136: \setfont\textsc\scshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
                   1137: \setfont\textttsl\ttslshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
                   1138: \font\texti=cmmi10 scaled \mainmagstep
                   1139: \font\textsy=cmsy10 scaled \mainmagstep
                   1140:
                   1141: % A few fonts for @defun, etc.
1.2     ! noro     1142: \ifpTeX
        !          1143: \setfont\defbf\bxshape{10}{\magstep1} %was 1314
        !          1144: \setfont\deftt\ttshape{10}{\magstep1}
        !          1145: \font\defmc=min10 scaled \magstep1
        !          1146: \font\defgt=goth10 scaled \magstep1
        !          1147: \def\df{\let\tentt=\deftt \let\tenmin=\defmc
        !          1148: \let\tengt=\defgt \let\tenbf = \defbf \bf}
        !          1149: \else\ifjTeX
        !          1150: \setfont\defbf\bxshape{10}{\magstep1} %was 1314
        !          1151: \setfont\deftt\ttshape{10}{\magstep1}
        !          1152: \jfont\defmc=dm10 scaled \magstep1
        !          1153: \jfont\defgt=dg10 scaled \magstep1
        !          1154: \def\df{\let\tentt=\deftt \let\tenmin=\defmc
        !          1155: \let\tengt=\defgt \let\tenbf = \defbf \bf}
        !          1156: \else
1.1       noro     1157: \setfont\defbf\bxshape{10}{\magstep1} %was 1314
                   1158: \setfont\deftt\ttshape{10}{\magstep1}
                   1159: \def\df{\let\tentt=\deftt \let\tenbf = \defbf \bf}
1.2     ! noro     1160: \fi\fi
1.1       noro     1161:
                   1162: % Fonts for indices, footnotes, small examples (9pt).
                   1163: \setfont\smallrm\rmshape{9}{1000}
                   1164: \setfont\smalltt\ttshape{9}{1000}
                   1165: \setfont\smallbf\bfshape{10}{900}
                   1166: \setfont\smallit\itshape{9}{1000}
                   1167: \setfont\smallsl\slshape{9}{1000}
                   1168: \setfont\smallsf\sfshape{9}{1000}
                   1169: \setfont\smallsc\scshape{10}{900}
                   1170: \setfont\smallttsl\ttslshape{10}{900}
                   1171: \font\smalli=cmmi9
                   1172: \font\smallsy=cmsy9
1.2     ! noro     1173: \ifpTeX
        !          1174: \font\smallmc=min9
        !          1175: \font\smallgt=goth9
        !          1176: \fi
        !          1177: \ifjTeX
        !          1178: \jfont\smallmc=dm9
        !          1179: \jfont\smallgt=dg9
        !          1180: \fi
1.1       noro     1181:
                   1182: % Fonts for title page:
                   1183: \setfont\titlerm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep3}
                   1184: \setfont\titleit\itbshape{10}{\magstep4}
                   1185: \setfont\titlesl\slbshape{10}{\magstep4}
                   1186: \setfont\titlett\ttbshape{12}{\magstep3}
                   1187: \setfont\titlettsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep4}
                   1188: \setfont\titlesf\sfbshape{17}{\magstep1}
1.2     ! noro     1189: \ifpTeX
        !          1190: \font\titlemc=min10 scaled \magstep4
        !          1191: \font\titlegt=goth10 scaled \magstep4
        !          1192: \fi
        !          1193: \ifjTeX
        !          1194: \jfont\titlemc=dm10 scaled \magstep4
        !          1195: \jfont\titlegt=dg10 scaled \magstep4
        !          1196: \fi
1.1       noro     1197: \let\titlebf=\titlerm
                   1198: \setfont\titlesc\scbshape{10}{\magstep4}
                   1199: \font\titlei=cmmi12 scaled \magstep3
                   1200: \font\titlesy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep4
                   1201: \def\authorrm{\secrm}
1.2     ! noro     1202: \ifjaTeX
        !          1203: \def\authormc{\secmc}
        !          1204: \fi
1.1       noro     1205:
                   1206: % Chapter (and unnumbered) fonts (17.28pt).
                   1207: \setfont\chaprm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep2}
                   1208: \setfont\chapit\itbshape{10}{\magstep3}
                   1209: \setfont\chapsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep3}
                   1210: \setfont\chaptt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep2}
                   1211: \setfont\chapttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep3}
                   1212: \setfont\chapsf\sfbshape{17}{1000}
1.2     ! noro     1213: \ifpTeX
        !          1214: \font\chapmc=min10 scaled \magstep3
        !          1215: \font\chapgt=goth10 scaled \magstep3
        !          1216: \fi
        !          1217: \ifjTeX
        !          1218: \jfont\chapmc=dm10 scaled \magstep3
        !          1219: \jfont\chapgt=dg10 scaled \magstep3
        !          1220: \fi
1.1       noro     1221: \let\chapbf=\chaprm
                   1222: \setfont\chapsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep3}
                   1223: \font\chapi=cmmi12 scaled \magstep2
                   1224: \font\chapsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep3
                   1225:
                   1226: % Section fonts (14.4pt).
                   1227: \setfont\secrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep1}
                   1228: \setfont\secit\itbshape{10}{\magstep2}
                   1229: \setfont\secsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep2}
                   1230: \setfont\sectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep1}
                   1231: \setfont\secttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep2}
                   1232: \setfont\secsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstep1}
1.2     ! noro     1233: \ifpTeX
        !          1234: \font\secmc=min10 scaled \magstep2
        !          1235: \font\secgt=goth10 scaled \magstep2
        !          1236: \fi
        !          1237: \ifjTeX
        !          1238: \jfont\secmc=dm10 scaled \magstep2
        !          1239: \jfont\secgt=dg10 scaled \magstep2
        !          1240: \fi
1.1       noro     1241: \let\secbf\secrm
                   1242: \setfont\secsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep2}
                   1243: \font\seci=cmmi12 scaled \magstep1
                   1244: \font\secsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep2
                   1245:
                   1246: % \setfont\ssecrm\bxshape{10}{\magstep1}    % This size an font looked bad.
                   1247: % \setfont\ssecit\itshape{10}{\magstep1}    % The letters were too crowded.
                   1248: % \setfont\ssecsl\slshape{10}{\magstep1}
                   1249: % \setfont\ssectt\ttshape{10}{\magstep1}
                   1250: % \setfont\ssecsf\sfshape{10}{\magstep1}
                   1251:
1.2     ! noro     1252: %\setfont\ssecrm\bfshape{10}{1315}    % Note the use of cmb rather than cmbx.
        !          1253: %\setfont\ssecit\itshape{10}{1315}    % Also, the size is a little larger than
        !          1254: %\setfont\ssecsl\slshape{10}{1315}    % being scaled magstep1.
1.1       noro     1255: %\setfont\ssectt\ttshape{10}{1315}
                   1256: %\setfont\ssecsf\sfshape{10}{1315}
                   1257:
                   1258: %\let\ssecbf=\ssecrm
                   1259:
                   1260: % Subsection fonts (13.15pt).
                   1261: \setfont\ssecrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstephalf}
                   1262: \setfont\ssecit\itbshape{10}{1315}
                   1263: \setfont\ssecsl\slbshape{10}{1315}
                   1264: \setfont\ssectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstephalf}
                   1265: \setfont\ssecttsl\ttslshape{10}{1315}
                   1266: \setfont\ssecsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstephalf}
1.2     ! noro     1267: \ifpTeX
        !          1268: \font\ssecmc=min10 scaled 1315
        !          1269: \font\ssecgt=goth10 scaled 1315
        !          1270: \fi
        !          1271: \ifjTeX
        !          1272: \jfont\ssecmc=dm10 scaled 1315
        !          1273: \jfont\ssecgt=dg10 scaled 1315
        !          1274: \fi
1.1       noro     1275: \let\ssecbf\ssecrm
                   1276: \setfont\ssecsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep1}
                   1277: \font\sseci=cmmi12 scaled \magstephalf
                   1278: \font\ssecsy=cmsy10 scaled 1315
                   1279: % The smallcaps and symbol fonts should actually be scaled \magstep1.5,
                   1280: % but that is not a standard magnification.
                   1281:
                   1282: % In order for the font changes to affect most math symbols and letters,
                   1283: % we have to define the \textfont of the standard families.  Since
                   1284: % texinfo doesn't allow for producing subscripts and superscripts, we
                   1285: % don't bother to reset \scriptfont and \scriptscriptfont (which would
                   1286: % also require loading a lot more fonts).
                   1287: %
1.2     ! noro     1288: \ifpTeX
        !          1289: \def\resetmathfonts{%
        !          1290:   \textfont0 = \tenrm \textfont1 = \teni \textfont2 = \tensy
        !          1291:   \textfont\itfam = \tenit \textfont\slfam = \tensl \textfont\bffam = \tenbf
        !          1292:   \textfont\ttfam = \tentt \textfont\sffam = \tensf
        !          1293:   \textfont\mcfam = \tenmin \textfont\gtfam = \tengt
        !          1294: }
        !          1295: \else
1.1       noro     1296: \def\resetmathfonts{%
                   1297:   \textfont0 = \tenrm \textfont1 = \teni \textfont2 = \tensy
                   1298:   \textfont\itfam = \tenit \textfont\slfam = \tensl \textfont\bffam = \tenbf
                   1299:   \textfont\ttfam = \tentt \textfont\sffam = \tensf
                   1300: }
1.2     ! noro     1301: \fi
1.1       noro     1302:
                   1303: % The font-changing commands redefine the meanings of \tenSTYLE, instead
                   1304: % of just \STYLE.  We do this so that font changes will continue to work
                   1305: % in math mode, where it is the current \fam that is relevant in most
                   1306: % cases, not the current font.  Plain TeX does \def\bf{\fam=\bffam
                   1307: % \tenbf}, for example.  By redefining \tenbf, we obviate the need to
                   1308: % redefine \bf itself.
1.2     ! noro     1309: \ifjaTeX
1.1       noro     1310: \def\textfonts{%
                   1311:   \let\tenrm=\textrm \let\tenit=\textit \let\tensl=\textsl
                   1312:   \let\tenbf=\textbf \let\tentt=\texttt \let\smallcaps=\textsc
                   1313:   \let\tensf=\textsf \let\teni=\texti \let\tensy=\textsy \let\tenttsl=\textttsl
1.2     ! noro     1314:   \let\tenmin=\textmc \let\tengt=\textgt
1.1       noro     1315:   \resetmathfonts}
1.2     ! noro     1316: \else
        !          1317: \def\textfonts{%
        !          1318:   \let\tenrm=\textrm \let\tenit=\textit \let\tensl=\textsl
        !          1319:   \let\tenbf=\textbf \let\tentt=\texttt \let\smallcaps=\textsc
        !          1320:   \let\tensf=\textsf \let\teni=\texti \let\tensy=\textsy \let\tenttsl=\textttsl
        !          1321:   \resetmathfonts}
        !          1322: \fi
        !          1323: %
        !          1324: \ifjaTeX
        !          1325: \def\titlefonts{%
        !          1326:   \let\tenrm=\titlerm \let\tenit=\titleit \let\tensl=\titlesl
        !          1327:   \let\tenbf=\titlebf \let\tentt=\titlett \let\smallcaps=\titlesc
        !          1328:   \let\tensf=\titlesf \let\teni=\titlei \let\tensy=\titlesy
        !          1329:   \let\tenttsl=\titlettsl
        !          1330:   \let\tenmin=\titlemc \let\tengt=\titlegt
        !          1331:   \resetmathfonts \setleading{25pt}}
        !          1332: \else
1.1       noro     1333: \def\titlefonts{%
                   1334:   \let\tenrm=\titlerm \let\tenit=\titleit \let\tensl=\titlesl
                   1335:   \let\tenbf=\titlebf \let\tentt=\titlett \let\smallcaps=\titlesc
                   1336:   \let\tensf=\titlesf \let\teni=\titlei \let\tensy=\titlesy
                   1337:   \let\tenttsl=\titlettsl
                   1338:   \resetmathfonts \setleading{25pt}}
1.2     ! noro     1339: \fi
1.1       noro     1340: \def\titlefont#1{{\titlefonts\rm #1}}
1.2     ! noro     1341: %
        !          1342: \ifjaTeX
1.1       noro     1343: \def\chapfonts{%
                   1344:   \let\tenrm=\chaprm \let\tenit=\chapit \let\tensl=\chapsl
                   1345:   \let\tenbf=\chapbf \let\tentt=\chaptt \let\smallcaps=\chapsc
                   1346:   \let\tensf=\chapsf \let\teni=\chapi \let\tensy=\chapsy \let\tenttsl=\chapttsl
1.2     ! noro     1347:   \let\tenmin=\chapmc \let\tengt=\chapgt
1.1       noro     1348:   \resetmathfonts \setleading{19pt}}
1.2     ! noro     1349: \else
        !          1350: \def\chapfonts{%
        !          1351:   \let\tenrm=\chaprm \let\tenit=\chapit \let\tensl=\chapsl
        !          1352:   \let\tenbf=\chapbf \let\tentt=\chaptt \let\smallcaps=\chapsc
        !          1353:   \let\tensf=\chapsf \let\teni=\chapi \let\tensy=\chapsy \let\tenttsl=\chapttsl
        !          1354:   \resetmathfonts \setleading{19pt}}
        !          1355: \fi
        !          1356: %
        !          1357: \ifjaTeX
1.1       noro     1358: \def\secfonts{%
                   1359:   \let\tenrm=\secrm \let\tenit=\secit \let\tensl=\secsl
                   1360:   \let\tenbf=\secbf \let\tentt=\sectt \let\smallcaps=\secsc
                   1361:   \let\tensf=\secsf \let\teni=\seci \let\tensy=\secsy \let\tenttsl=\secttsl
1.2     ! noro     1362:   \let\tenmin=\secmc \let\tengt=\secgt
1.1       noro     1363:   \resetmathfonts \setleading{16pt}}
1.2     ! noro     1364: \else
        !          1365: \def\secfonts{%
        !          1366:   \let\tenrm=\secrm \let\tenit=\secit \let\tensl=\secsl
        !          1367:   \let\tenbf=\secbf \let\tentt=\sectt \let\smallcaps=\secsc
        !          1368:   \let\tensf=\secsf \let\teni=\seci \let\tensy=\secsy \let\tenttsl=\secttsl
        !          1369:   \resetmathfonts \setleading{16pt}}
        !          1370: \fi
        !          1371: %
        !          1372: \ifjaTeX
1.1       noro     1373: \def\subsecfonts{%
                   1374:   \let\tenrm=\ssecrm \let\tenit=\ssecit \let\tensl=\ssecsl
                   1375:   \let\tenbf=\ssecbf \let\tentt=\ssectt \let\smallcaps=\ssecsc
                   1376:   \let\tensf=\ssecsf \let\teni=\sseci \let\tensy=\ssecsy \let\tenttsl=\ssecttsl
1.2     ! noro     1377:   \let\tenmin=\ssecmc \let\tengt=\ssecgt
1.1       noro     1378:   \resetmathfonts \setleading{15pt}}
1.2     ! noro     1379: \else
        !          1380: \def\subsecfonts{%
        !          1381:   \let\tenrm=\ssecrm \let\tenit=\ssecit \let\tensl=\ssecsl
        !          1382:   \let\tenbf=\ssecbf \let\tentt=\ssectt \let\smallcaps=\ssecsc
        !          1383:   \let\tensf=\ssecsf \let\teni=\sseci \let\tensy=\ssecsy \let\tenttsl=\ssecttsl
        !          1384:   \resetmathfonts \setleading{15pt}}
        !          1385: \fi
1.1       noro     1386: \let\subsubsecfonts = \subsecfonts % Maybe make sssec fonts scaled magstephalf?
1.2     ! noro     1387: %
        !          1388: \ifjaTeX
        !          1389: \def\smallfonts{%
        !          1390:   \let\tenrm=\smallrm \let\tenit=\smallit \let\tensl=\smallsl
        !          1391:   \let\tenbf=\smallbf \let\tentt=\smalltt \let\smallcaps=\smallsc
        !          1392:   \let\tensf=\smallsf \let\teni=\smalli \let\tensy=\smallsy
        !          1393:   \let\tenttsl=\smallttsl
        !          1394:   \let\tenmin=\smallmc \let\tengt=\smallgt
        !          1395:   \resetmathfonts \setleading{11pt}}
        !          1396: \else
1.1       noro     1397: \def\smallfonts{%
                   1398:   \let\tenrm=\smallrm \let\tenit=\smallit \let\tensl=\smallsl
                   1399:   \let\tenbf=\smallbf \let\tentt=\smalltt \let\smallcaps=\smallsc
                   1400:   \let\tensf=\smallsf \let\teni=\smalli \let\tensy=\smallsy
                   1401:   \let\tenttsl=\smallttsl
                   1402:   \resetmathfonts \setleading{11pt}}
1.2     ! noro     1403: \fi
1.1       noro     1404: % Set up the default fonts, so we can use them for creating boxes.
                   1405: %
                   1406: \textfonts
                   1407:
                   1408: % Define these so they can be easily changed for other fonts.
                   1409: \def\angleleft{$\langle$}
                   1410: \def\angleright{$\rangle$}
                   1411:
                   1412: % Count depth in font-changes, for error checks
                   1413: \newcount\fontdepth \fontdepth=0
                   1414:
                   1415: % Fonts for short table of contents.
                   1416: \setfont\shortcontrm\rmshape{12}{1000}
                   1417: \setfont\shortcontbf\bxshape{12}{1000}
                   1418: \setfont\shortcontsl\slshape{12}{1000}
1.2     ! noro     1419: \ifpTeX
        !          1420: \font\shortcontmc=min10 scaled \magstep1
        !          1421: \font\shortcontgt=goth10 scaled \magstep1
        !          1422: \fi
        !          1423: \ifjTeX
        !          1424: \jfont\shortcontmc=dm10 scaled \magstep1
        !          1425: \jfont\shortcontgt=dg10 scaled \magstep1
        !          1426: \fi
1.1       noro     1427: %% Add scribe-like font environments, plus @l for inline lisp (usually sans
                   1428: %% serif) and @ii for TeX italic
                   1429:
                   1430: % \smartitalic{ARG} outputs arg in italics, followed by an italic correction
                   1431: % unless the following character is such as not to need one.
                   1432: \def\smartitalicx{\ifx\next,\else\ifx\next-\else\ifx\next.\else\/\fi\fi\fi}
                   1433: \def\smartslanted#1{{\sl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx}
                   1434: \def\smartitalic#1{{\it #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx}
                   1435:
                   1436: \let\i=\smartitalic
                   1437: \let\var=\smartslanted
                   1438: \let\dfn=\smartslanted
                   1439: \let\emph=\smartitalic
                   1440: \let\cite=\smartslanted
                   1441:
                   1442: \def\b#1{{\bf #1}}
                   1443: \let\strong=\b
                   1444:
                   1445: % We can't just use \exhyphenpenalty, because that only has effect at
                   1446: % the end of a paragraph.  Restore normal hyphenation at the end of the
                   1447: % group within which \nohyphenation is presumably called.
                   1448: %
                   1449: \def\nohyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = -1  \aftergroup\restorehyphenation}
                   1450: \def\restorehyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = `- }
                   1451:
                   1452: \def\t#1{%
                   1453:   {\tt \rawbackslash \frenchspacing #1}%
                   1454:   \null
                   1455: }
                   1456: \let\ttfont=\t
                   1457: \def\samp#1{`\tclose{#1}'\null}
                   1458: \setfont\keyrm\rmshape{8}{1000}
                   1459: \font\keysy=cmsy9
                   1460: \def\key#1{{\keyrm\textfont2=\keysy \leavevmode\hbox{%
                   1461:   \raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleleft}\kern-.08em\vtop{%
                   1462:     \vbox{\hrule\kern-0.4pt
                   1463:      \hbox{\raise0.4pt\hbox{\vphantom{\angleleft}}#1}}%
                   1464:     \kern-0.4pt\hrule}%
                   1465:   \kern-.06em\raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleright}}}}
                   1466: % The old definition, with no lozenge:
                   1467: %\def\key #1{{\ttsl \nohyphenation \uppercase{#1}}\null}
                   1468: \def\ctrl #1{{\tt \rawbackslash \hat}#1}
                   1469:
                   1470: % @file, @option are the same as @samp.
                   1471: \let\file=\samp
                   1472: \let\option=\samp
                   1473:
                   1474: % @code is a modification of @t,
                   1475: % which makes spaces the same size as normal in the surrounding text.
                   1476: \def\tclose#1{%
                   1477:   {%
                   1478:     % Change normal interword space to be same as for the current font.
                   1479:     \spaceskip = \fontdimen2\font
                   1480:     %
                   1481:     % Switch to typewriter.
                   1482:     \tt
                   1483:     %
                   1484:     % But `\ ' produces the large typewriter interword space.
                   1485:     \def\ {{\spaceskip = 0pt{} }}%
                   1486:     %
                   1487:     % Turn off hyphenation.
                   1488:     \nohyphenation
                   1489:     %
                   1490:     \rawbackslash
                   1491:     \frenchspacing
                   1492:     #1%
                   1493:   }%
                   1494:   \null
                   1495: }
                   1496:
                   1497: % We *must* turn on hyphenation at `-' and `_' in \code.
                   1498: % Otherwise, it is too hard to avoid overfull hboxes
                   1499: % in the Emacs manual, the Library manual, etc.
                   1500:
                   1501: % Unfortunately, TeX uses one parameter (\hyphenchar) to control
                   1502: % both hyphenation at - and hyphenation within words.
                   1503: % We must therefore turn them both off (\tclose does that)
                   1504: % and arrange explicitly to hyphenate at a dash.
                   1505: %  -- rms.
                   1506: {
                   1507:   \catcode`\-=\active
                   1508:   \catcode`\_=\active
                   1509:   %
                   1510:   \global\def\code{\begingroup
                   1511:     \catcode`\-=\active \let-\codedash
                   1512:     \catcode`\_=\active \let_\codeunder
                   1513:     \codex
                   1514:   }
                   1515:   %
                   1516:   % If we end up with any active - characters when handling the index,
                   1517:   % just treat them as a normal -.
                   1518:   \global\def\indexbreaks{\catcode`\-=\active \let-\realdash}
                   1519: }
                   1520:
                   1521: \def\realdash{-}
                   1522: \def\codedash{-\discretionary{}{}{}}
                   1523: \def\codeunder{\ifusingtt{\normalunderscore\discretionary{}{}{}}{\_}}
                   1524: \def\codex #1{\tclose{#1}\endgroup}
                   1525:
                   1526: %\let\exp=\tclose  %Was temporary
                   1527:
                   1528: % @kbd is like @code, except that if the argument is just one @key command,
                   1529: % then @kbd has no effect.
                   1530:
                   1531: % @kbdinputstyle -- arg is `distinct' (@kbd uses slanted tty font always),
                   1532: %   `example' (@kbd uses ttsl only inside of @example and friends),
                   1533: %   or `code' (@kbd uses normal tty font always).
                   1534: \def\kbdinputstyle{\parsearg\kbdinputstylexxx}
                   1535: \def\kbdinputstylexxx#1{%
                   1536:   \def\arg{#1}%
                   1537:   \ifx\arg\worddistinct
                   1538:     \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\ttsl}%
                   1539:   \else\ifx\arg\wordexample
                   1540:     \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}%
                   1541:   \else\ifx\arg\wordcode
                   1542:     \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\tt}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}%
                   1543:   \fi\fi\fi
                   1544: }
                   1545: \def\worddistinct{distinct}
                   1546: \def\wordexample{example}
                   1547: \def\wordcode{code}
                   1548:
                   1549: % Default is kbdinputdistinct.  (Too much of a hassle to call the macro,
                   1550: % the catcodes are wrong for parsearg to work.)
                   1551: \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\ttsl}
                   1552:
                   1553: \def\xkey{\key}
                   1554: \def\kbdfoo#1#2#3\par{\def\one{#1}\def\three{#3}\def\threex{??}%
                   1555: \ifx\one\xkey\ifx\threex\three \key{#2}%
                   1556: \else{\tclose{\kbdfont\look}}\fi
                   1557: \else{\tclose{\kbdfont\look}}\fi}
                   1558:
                   1559: % For @url, @env, @command quotes seem unnecessary, so use \code.
                   1560: \let\url=\code
                   1561: \let\env=\code
                   1562: \let\command=\code
                   1563:
                   1564: % @uref (abbreviation for `urlref') takes an optional (comma-separated)
                   1565: % second argument specifying the text to display and an optional third
                   1566: % arg as text to display instead of (rather than in addition to) the url
                   1567: % itself.  First (mandatory) arg is the url.  Perhaps eventually put in
                   1568: % a hypertex \special here.
                   1569: %
                   1570: \def\uref#1{\douref #1,,,\finish}
                   1571: \def\douref#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{\begingroup
                   1572:   \unsepspaces
                   1573:   \pdfurl{#1}%
                   1574:   \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}%
                   1575:   \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt
                   1576:     \unhbox0 % third arg given, show only that
                   1577:   \else
                   1578:     \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
                   1579:     \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt
                   1580:       \ifpdf
                   1581:         \unhbox0             % PDF: 2nd arg given, show only it
                   1582:       \else
                   1583:         \unhbox0\ (\code{#1})% DVI: 2nd arg given, show both it and url
                   1584:       \fi
                   1585:     \else
                   1586:       \code{#1}% only url given, so show it
                   1587:     \fi
                   1588:   \fi
                   1589:   \endlink
                   1590: \endgroup}
                   1591:
                   1592: % rms does not like angle brackets --karl, 17may97.
                   1593: % So now @email is just like @uref, unless we are pdf.
                   1594: %
                   1595: %\def\email#1{\angleleft{\tt #1}\angleright}
                   1596: \ifpdf
                   1597:   \def\email#1{\doemail#1,,\finish}
                   1598:   \def\doemail#1,#2,#3\finish{\begingroup
                   1599:     \unsepspaces
                   1600:     \pdfurl{mailto:#1}%
                   1601:     \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
                   1602:     \ifdim\wd0>0pt\unhbox0\else\code{#1}\fi
                   1603:     \endlink
                   1604:   \endgroup}
                   1605: \else
                   1606:   \let\email=\uref
                   1607: \fi
                   1608:
                   1609: % Check if we are currently using a typewriter font.  Since all the
                   1610: % Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero interword stretch (and
                   1611: % shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all typewriter fonts to have
                   1612: % this property, we can check that font parameter.
                   1613: %
                   1614: \def\ifmonospace{\ifdim\fontdimen3\font=0pt }
                   1615:
                   1616: % Typeset a dimension, e.g., `in' or `pt'.  The only reason for the
                   1617: % argument is to make the input look right: @dmn{pt} instead of @dmn{}pt.
                   1618: %
                   1619: \def\dmn#1{\thinspace #1}
                   1620:
                   1621: \def\kbd#1{\def\look{#1}\expandafter\kbdfoo\look??\par}
                   1622:
                   1623: % @l was never documented to mean ``switch to the Lisp font'',
                   1624: % and it is not used as such in any manual I can find.  We need it for
                   1625: % Polish suppressed-l.  --karl, 22sep96.
                   1626: %\def\l#1{{\li #1}\null}
                   1627:
                   1628: % Explicit font changes: @r, @sc, undocumented @ii.
                   1629: \def\r#1{{\rm #1}}              % roman font
                   1630: \def\sc#1{{\smallcaps#1}}       % smallcaps font
                   1631: \def\ii#1{{\it #1}}             % italic font
                   1632:
                   1633: % @acronym downcases the argument and prints in smallcaps.
                   1634: \def\acronym#1{{\smallcaps \lowercase{#1}}}
                   1635:
                   1636: % @pounds{} is a sterling sign.
                   1637: \def\pounds{{\it\$}}
                   1638:
                   1639:
                   1640: \message{page headings,}
                   1641:
                   1642: \newskip\titlepagetopglue \titlepagetopglue = 1.5in
                   1643: \newskip\titlepagebottomglue \titlepagebottomglue = 2pc
                   1644:
                   1645: % First the title page.  Must do @settitle before @titlepage.
                   1646: \newif\ifseenauthor
                   1647: \newif\iffinishedtitlepage
                   1648:
                   1649: % Do an implicit @contents or @shortcontents after @end titlepage if the
                   1650: % user says @setcontentsaftertitlepage or @setshortcontentsaftertitlepage.
                   1651: %
                   1652: \newif\ifsetcontentsaftertitlepage
                   1653:  \let\setcontentsaftertitlepage = \setcontentsaftertitlepagetrue
                   1654: \newif\ifsetshortcontentsaftertitlepage
                   1655:  \let\setshortcontentsaftertitlepage = \setshortcontentsaftertitlepagetrue
                   1656:
                   1657: \def\shorttitlepage{\parsearg\shorttitlepagezzz}
                   1658: \def\shorttitlepagezzz #1{\begingroup\hbox{}\vskip 1.5in \chaprm \centerline{#1}%
                   1659:         \endgroup\page\hbox{}\page}
                   1660:
                   1661: \def\titlepage{\begingroup \parindent=0pt \textfonts
                   1662:    \let\subtitlerm=\tenrm
                   1663:    \def\subtitlefont{\subtitlerm \normalbaselineskip = 13pt \normalbaselines}%
                   1664:    %
1.2     ! noro     1665: \ifjaTeX
        !          1666:    \def\authorfont{\authormc\authorrm
        !          1667:    \normalbaselineskip = 16pt \normalbaselines}%
        !          1668: \else
1.1       noro     1669:    \def\authorfont{\authorrm \normalbaselineskip = 16pt \normalbaselines}%
1.2     ! noro     1670: \fi
1.1       noro     1671:    %
                   1672:    % Leave some space at the very top of the page.
                   1673:    \vglue\titlepagetopglue
                   1674:    %
                   1675:    % Now you can print the title using @title.
                   1676:    \def\title{\parsearg\titlezzz}%
                   1677:    \def\titlezzz##1{\leftline{\titlefonts\rm ##1}
                   1678:                     % print a rule at the page bottom also.
                   1679:                     \finishedtitlepagefalse
                   1680:                     \vskip4pt \hrule height 4pt width \hsize \vskip4pt}%
                   1681:    % No rule at page bottom unless we print one at the top with @title.
                   1682:    \finishedtitlepagetrue
                   1683:    %
                   1684:    % Now you can put text using @subtitle.
                   1685:    \def\subtitle{\parsearg\subtitlezzz}%
                   1686:    \def\subtitlezzz##1{{\subtitlefont \rightline{##1}}}%
                   1687:    %
                   1688:    % @author should come last, but may come many times.
                   1689:    \def\author{\parsearg\authorzzz}%
                   1690:    \def\authorzzz##1{\ifseenauthor\else\vskip 0pt plus 1filll\seenauthortrue\fi
                   1691:       {\authorfont \leftline{##1}}}%
                   1692:    %
                   1693:    % Most title ``pages'' are actually two pages long, with space
                   1694:    % at the top of the second.  We don't want the ragged left on the second.
                   1695:    \let\oldpage = \page
                   1696:    \def\page{%
                   1697:       \iffinishedtitlepage\else
                   1698:          \finishtitlepage
                   1699:       \fi
                   1700:       \oldpage
                   1701:       \let\page = \oldpage
                   1702:       \hbox{}}%
                   1703: %   \def\page{\oldpage \hbox{}}
                   1704: }
                   1705:
                   1706: \def\Etitlepage{%
                   1707:    \iffinishedtitlepage\else
                   1708:       \finishtitlepage
                   1709:    \fi
                   1710:    % It is important to do the page break before ending the group,
                   1711:    % because the headline and footline are only empty inside the group.
                   1712:    % If we use the new definition of \page, we always get a blank page
                   1713:    % after the title page, which we certainly don't want.
                   1714:    \oldpage
                   1715:    \endgroup
                   1716:    %
                   1717:    % If they want short, they certainly want long too.
                   1718:    \ifsetshortcontentsaftertitlepage
                   1719:      \shortcontents
                   1720:      \contents
                   1721:      \global\let\shortcontents = \relax
                   1722:      \global\let\contents = \relax
                   1723:    \fi
                   1724:    %
                   1725:    \ifsetcontentsaftertitlepage
                   1726:      \contents
                   1727:      \global\let\contents = \relax
                   1728:      \global\let\shortcontents = \relax
                   1729:    \fi
                   1730:    %
                   1731:    \ifpdf \pdfmakepagedesttrue \fi
                   1732:    %
                   1733:    \HEADINGSon
                   1734: }
                   1735:
                   1736: \def\finishtitlepage{%
                   1737:    \vskip4pt \hrule height 2pt width \hsize
                   1738:    \vskip\titlepagebottomglue
                   1739:    \finishedtitlepagetrue
                   1740: }
                   1741:
                   1742: %%% Set up page headings and footings.
                   1743:
                   1744: \let\thispage=\folio
                   1745:
                   1746: \newtoks\evenheadline    % headline on even pages
                   1747: \newtoks\oddheadline     % headline on odd pages
                   1748: \newtoks\evenfootline    % footline on even pages
                   1749: \newtoks\oddfootline     % footline on odd pages
                   1750:
                   1751: % Now make Tex use those variables
                   1752: \headline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddheadline
                   1753:                             \else \the\evenheadline \fi}}
                   1754: \footline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddfootline
                   1755:                             \else \the\evenfootline \fi}\HEADINGShook}
                   1756: \let\HEADINGShook=\relax
                   1757:
                   1758: % Commands to set those variables.
                   1759: % For example, this is what  @headings on  does
                   1760: % @evenheading @thistitle|@thispage|@thischapter
                   1761: % @oddheading @thischapter|@thispage|@thistitle
                   1762: % @evenfooting @thisfile||
                   1763: % @oddfooting ||@thisfile
                   1764:
                   1765: \def\evenheading{\parsearg\evenheadingxxx}
                   1766: \def\oddheading{\parsearg\oddheadingxxx}
                   1767: \def\everyheading{\parsearg\everyheadingxxx}
                   1768:
                   1769: \def\evenfooting{\parsearg\evenfootingxxx}
                   1770: \def\oddfooting{\parsearg\oddfootingxxx}
                   1771: \def\everyfooting{\parsearg\everyfootingxxx}
                   1772:
                   1773: {\catcode`\@=0 %
                   1774:
                   1775: \gdef\evenheadingxxx #1{\evenheadingyyy #1@|@|@|@|\finish}
                   1776: \gdef\evenheadingyyy #1@|#2@|#3@|#4\finish{%
                   1777: \global\evenheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}}
                   1778:
                   1779: \gdef\oddheadingxxx #1{\oddheadingyyy #1@|@|@|@|\finish}
                   1780: \gdef\oddheadingyyy #1@|#2@|#3@|#4\finish{%
                   1781: \global\oddheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}}
                   1782:
                   1783: \gdef\everyheadingxxx#1{\oddheadingxxx{#1}\evenheadingxxx{#1}}%
                   1784:
                   1785: \gdef\evenfootingxxx #1{\evenfootingyyy #1@|@|@|@|\finish}
                   1786: \gdef\evenfootingyyy #1@|#2@|#3@|#4\finish{%
                   1787: \global\evenfootline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}}
                   1788:
                   1789: \gdef\oddfootingxxx #1{\oddfootingyyy #1@|@|@|@|\finish}
                   1790: \gdef\oddfootingyyy #1@|#2@|#3@|#4\finish{%
                   1791:   \global\oddfootline = {\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}%
                   1792:   %
                   1793:   % Leave some space for the footline.  Hopefully ok to assume
                   1794:   % @evenfooting will not be used by itself.
                   1795:   \global\advance\pageheight by -\baselineskip
                   1796:   \global\advance\vsize by -\baselineskip
                   1797: }
                   1798:
                   1799: \gdef\everyfootingxxx#1{\oddfootingxxx{#1}\evenfootingxxx{#1}}
                   1800: %
                   1801: }% unbind the catcode of @.
                   1802:
                   1803: % @headings double      turns headings on for double-sided printing.
                   1804: % @headings single      turns headings on for single-sided printing.
                   1805: % @headings off         turns them off.
                   1806: % @headings on          same as @headings double, retained for compatibility.
                   1807: % @headings after       turns on double-sided headings after this page.
                   1808: % @headings doubleafter turns on double-sided headings after this page.
                   1809: % @headings singleafter turns on single-sided headings after this page.
                   1810: % By default, they are off at the start of a document,
                   1811: % and turned `on' after @end titlepage.
                   1812:
                   1813: \def\headings #1 {\csname HEADINGS#1\endcsname}
                   1814:
                   1815: \def\HEADINGSoff{
                   1816: \global\evenheadline={\hfil} \global\evenfootline={\hfil}
                   1817: \global\oddheadline={\hfil} \global\oddfootline={\hfil}}
                   1818: \HEADINGSoff
                   1819: % When we turn headings on, set the page number to 1.
                   1820: % For double-sided printing, put current file name in lower left corner,
                   1821: % chapter name on inside top of right hand pages, document
                   1822: % title on inside top of left hand pages, and page numbers on outside top
                   1823: % edge of all pages.
                   1824: \def\HEADINGSdouble{
                   1825: \global\pageno=1
                   1826: \global\evenfootline={\hfil}
                   1827: \global\oddfootline={\hfil}
                   1828: \global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}}
                   1829: \global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
                   1830: \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage
                   1831: }
                   1832: \let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
                   1833:
                   1834: % For single-sided printing, chapter title goes across top left of page,
                   1835: % page number on top right.
                   1836: \def\HEADINGSsingle{
                   1837: \global\pageno=1
                   1838: \global\evenfootline={\hfil}
                   1839: \global\oddfootline={\hfil}
                   1840: \global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
                   1841: \global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
                   1842: \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
                   1843: }
                   1844: \def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble}
                   1845:
                   1846: \def\HEADINGSafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSdoublex}
                   1847: \let\HEADINGSdoubleafter=\HEADINGSafter
                   1848: \def\HEADINGSdoublex{%
                   1849: \global\evenfootline={\hfil}
                   1850: \global\oddfootline={\hfil}
                   1851: \global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}}
                   1852: \global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
                   1853: \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage
                   1854: }
                   1855:
                   1856: \def\HEADINGSsingleafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSsinglex}
                   1857: \def\HEADINGSsinglex{%
                   1858: \global\evenfootline={\hfil}
                   1859: \global\oddfootline={\hfil}
                   1860: \global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
                   1861: \global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
                   1862: \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
                   1863: }
                   1864:
                   1865: % Subroutines used in generating headings
                   1866: % Produces Day Month Year style of output.
                   1867: \def\today{%
                   1868:   \number\day\space
                   1869:   \ifcase\month
                   1870:   \or\putwordMJan\or\putwordMFeb\or\putwordMMar\or\putwordMApr
                   1871:   \or\putwordMMay\or\putwordMJun\or\putwordMJul\or\putwordMAug
                   1872:   \or\putwordMSep\or\putwordMOct\or\putwordMNov\or\putwordMDec
                   1873:   \fi
                   1874:   \space\number\year}
                   1875:
                   1876: % @settitle line...  specifies the title of the document, for headings.
                   1877: % It generates no output of its own.
                   1878: \def\thistitle{\putwordNoTitle}
                   1879: \def\settitle{\parsearg\settitlezzz}
                   1880: \def\settitlezzz #1{\gdef\thistitle{#1}}
                   1881:
                   1882:
                   1883: \message{tables,}
                   1884: % Tables -- @table, @ftable, @vtable, @item(x), @kitem(x), @xitem(x).
                   1885:
                   1886: % default indentation of table text
                   1887: \newdimen\tableindent \tableindent=.8in
                   1888: % default indentation of @itemize and @enumerate text
                   1889: \newdimen\itemindent  \itemindent=.3in
                   1890: % margin between end of table item and start of table text.
                   1891: \newdimen\itemmargin  \itemmargin=.1in
                   1892:
                   1893: % used internally for \itemindent minus \itemmargin
                   1894: \newdimen\itemmax
                   1895:
                   1896: % Note @table, @vtable, and @vtable define @item, @itemx, etc., with
                   1897: % these defs.
                   1898: % They also define \itemindex
                   1899: % to index the item name in whatever manner is desired (perhaps none).
                   1900:
                   1901: \newif\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip
                   1902:
                   1903: \def\itemxpar{\par\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip\nobreak\vskip-\parskip\nobreak\fi}
                   1904:
                   1905: \def\internalBitem{\smallbreak \parsearg\itemzzz}
                   1906: \def\internalBitemx{\itemxpar \parsearg\itemzzz}
                   1907:
                   1908: \def\internalBxitem "#1"{\def\xitemsubtopix{#1} \smallbreak \parsearg\xitemzzz}
                   1909: \def\internalBxitemx "#1"{\def\xitemsubtopix{#1} \itemxpar \parsearg\xitemzzz}
                   1910:
                   1911: \def\internalBkitem{\smallbreak \parsearg\kitemzzz}
                   1912: \def\internalBkitemx{\itemxpar \parsearg\kitemzzz}
                   1913:
                   1914: \def\kitemzzz #1{\dosubind {kw}{\code{#1}}{for {\bf \lastfunction}}%
                   1915:                  \itemzzz {#1}}
                   1916:
                   1917: \def\xitemzzz #1{\dosubind {kw}{\code{#1}}{for {\bf \xitemsubtopic}}%
                   1918:                  \itemzzz {#1}}
                   1919:
                   1920: \def\itemzzz #1{\begingroup %
                   1921:   \advance\hsize by -\rightskip
                   1922:   \advance\hsize by -\tableindent
                   1923:   \setbox0=\hbox{\itemfont{#1}}%
                   1924:   \itemindex{#1}%
                   1925:   \nobreak % This prevents a break before @itemx.
                   1926:   %
                   1927:   % If the item text does not fit in the space we have, put it on a line
                   1928:   % by itself, and do not allow a page break either before or after that
                   1929:   % line.  We do not start a paragraph here because then if the next
                   1930:   % command is, e.g., @kindex, the whatsit would get put into the
                   1931:   % horizontal list on a line by itself, resulting in extra blank space.
                   1932:   \ifdim \wd0>\itemmax
                   1933:     %
                   1934:     % Make this a paragraph so we get the \parskip glue and wrapping,
                   1935:     % but leave it ragged-right.
                   1936:     \begingroup
                   1937:       \advance\leftskip by-\tableindent
                   1938:       \advance\hsize by\tableindent
                   1939:       \advance\rightskip by0pt plus1fil
                   1940:       \leavevmode\unhbox0\par
                   1941:     \endgroup
                   1942:     %
                   1943:     % We're going to be starting a paragraph, but we don't want the
                   1944:     % \parskip glue -- logically it's part of the @item we just started.
                   1945:     \nobreak \vskip-\parskip
                   1946:     %
                   1947:     % Stop a page break at the \parskip glue coming up.  Unfortunately
                   1948:     % we can't prevent a possible page break at the following
                   1949:     % \baselineskip glue.
                   1950:     \nobreak
                   1951:     \endgroup
                   1952:     \itemxneedsnegativevskipfalse
                   1953:   \else
                   1954:     % The item text fits into the space.  Start a paragraph, so that the
                   1955:     % following text (if any) will end up on the same line.
                   1956:     \noindent
                   1957:     % Do this with kerns and \unhbox so that if there is a footnote in
                   1958:     % the item text, it can migrate to the main vertical list and
                   1959:     % eventually be printed.
                   1960:     \nobreak\kern-\tableindent
                   1961:     \dimen0 = \itemmax  \advance\dimen0 by \itemmargin \advance\dimen0 by -\wd0
                   1962:     \unhbox0
                   1963:     \nobreak\kern\dimen0
                   1964:     \endgroup
                   1965:     \itemxneedsnegativevskiptrue
                   1966:   \fi
                   1967: }
                   1968:
                   1969: \def\item{\errmessage{@item while not in a table}}
                   1970: \def\itemx{\errmessage{@itemx while not in a table}}
                   1971: \def\kitem{\errmessage{@kitem while not in a table}}
                   1972: \def\kitemx{\errmessage{@kitemx while not in a table}}
                   1973: \def\xitem{\errmessage{@xitem while not in a table}}
                   1974: \def\xitemx{\errmessage{@xitemx while not in a table}}
                   1975:
                   1976: % Contains a kludge to get @end[description] to work.
                   1977: \def\description{\tablez{\dontindex}{1}{}{}{}{}}
                   1978:
                   1979: % @table, @ftable, @vtable.
                   1980: \def\table{\begingroup\inENV\obeylines\obeyspaces\tablex}
                   1981: {\obeylines\obeyspaces%
                   1982: \gdef\tablex #1^^M{%
                   1983: \tabley\dontindex#1        \endtabley}}
                   1984:
                   1985: \def\ftable{\begingroup\inENV\obeylines\obeyspaces\ftablex}
                   1986: {\obeylines\obeyspaces%
                   1987: \gdef\ftablex #1^^M{%
                   1988: \tabley\fnitemindex#1        \endtabley
                   1989: \def\Eftable{\endgraf\afterenvbreak\endgroup}%
                   1990: \let\Etable=\relax}}
                   1991:
                   1992: \def\vtable{\begingroup\inENV\obeylines\obeyspaces\vtablex}
                   1993: {\obeylines\obeyspaces%
                   1994: \gdef\vtablex #1^^M{%
                   1995: \tabley\vritemindex#1        \endtabley
                   1996: \def\Evtable{\endgraf\afterenvbreak\endgroup}%
                   1997: \let\Etable=\relax}}
                   1998:
                   1999: \def\dontindex #1{}
                   2000: \def\fnitemindex #1{\doind {fn}{\code{#1}}}%
                   2001: \def\vritemindex #1{\doind {vr}{\code{#1}}}%
                   2002:
                   2003: {\obeyspaces %
                   2004: \gdef\tabley#1#2 #3 #4 #5 #6 #7\endtabley{\endgroup%
                   2005: \tablez{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}{#6}}}
                   2006:
                   2007: \def\tablez #1#2#3#4#5#6{%
                   2008: \aboveenvbreak %
                   2009: \begingroup %
                   2010: \def\Edescription{\Etable}% Necessary kludge.
                   2011: \let\itemindex=#1%
                   2012: \ifnum 0#3>0 \advance \leftskip by #3\mil \fi %
                   2013: \ifnum 0#4>0 \tableindent=#4\mil \fi %
                   2014: \ifnum 0#5>0 \advance \rightskip by #5\mil \fi %
                   2015: \def\itemfont{#2}%
                   2016: \itemmax=\tableindent %
                   2017: \advance \itemmax by -\itemmargin %
                   2018: \advance \leftskip by \tableindent %
                   2019: \exdentamount=\tableindent
                   2020: \parindent = 0pt
                   2021: \parskip = \smallskipamount
                   2022: \ifdim \parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi%
                   2023: \def\Etable{\endgraf\afterenvbreak\endgroup}%
                   2024: \let\item = \internalBitem %
                   2025: \let\itemx = \internalBitemx %
                   2026: \let\kitem = \internalBkitem %
                   2027: \let\kitemx = \internalBkitemx %
                   2028: \let\xitem = \internalBxitem %
                   2029: \let\xitemx = \internalBxitemx %
                   2030: }
                   2031:
                   2032: % This is the counter used by @enumerate, which is really @itemize
                   2033:
                   2034: \newcount \itemno
                   2035:
                   2036: \def\itemize{\parsearg\itemizezzz}
                   2037:
                   2038: \def\itemizezzz #1{%
                   2039:   \begingroup % ended by the @end itemize
                   2040:   \itemizey {#1}{\Eitemize}
                   2041: }
                   2042:
                   2043: \def\itemizey #1#2{%
                   2044: \aboveenvbreak %
                   2045: \itemmax=\itemindent %
                   2046: \advance \itemmax by -\itemmargin %
                   2047: \advance \leftskip by \itemindent %
                   2048: \exdentamount=\itemindent
                   2049: \parindent = 0pt %
                   2050: \parskip = \smallskipamount %
                   2051: \ifdim \parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi%
                   2052: \def#2{\endgraf\afterenvbreak\endgroup}%
                   2053: \def\itemcontents{#1}%
                   2054: \let\item=\itemizeitem}
                   2055:
                   2056: % Set sfcode to normal for the chars that usually have another value.
                   2057: % These are `.?!:;,'
                   2058: \def\frenchspacing{\sfcode46=1000 \sfcode63=1000 \sfcode33=1000
                   2059:   \sfcode58=1000 \sfcode59=1000 \sfcode44=1000 }
                   2060:
                   2061: % \splitoff TOKENS\endmark defines \first to be the first token in
                   2062: % TOKENS, and \rest to be the remainder.
                   2063: %
                   2064: \def\splitoff#1#2\endmark{\def\first{#1}\def\rest{#2}}%
                   2065:
                   2066: % Allow an optional argument of an uppercase letter, lowercase letter,
                   2067: % or number, to specify the first label in the enumerated list.  No
                   2068: % argument is the same as `1'.
                   2069: %
                   2070: \def\enumerate{\parsearg\enumeratezzz}
                   2071: \def\enumeratezzz #1{\enumeratey #1  \endenumeratey}
                   2072: \def\enumeratey #1 #2\endenumeratey{%
                   2073:   \begingroup % ended by the @end enumerate
                   2074:   %
                   2075:   % If we were given no argument, pretend we were given `1'.
                   2076:   \def\thearg{#1}%
                   2077:   \ifx\thearg\empty \def\thearg{1}\fi
                   2078:   %
                   2079:   % Detect if the argument is a single token.  If so, it might be a
                   2080:   % letter.  Otherwise, the only valid thing it can be is a number.
                   2081:   % (We will always have one token, because of the test we just made.
                   2082:   % This is a good thing, since \splitoff doesn't work given nothing at
                   2083:   % all -- the first parameter is undelimited.)
                   2084:   \expandafter\splitoff\thearg\endmark
                   2085:   \ifx\rest\empty
                   2086:     % Only one token in the argument.  It could still be anything.
                   2087:     % A ``lowercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is nonzero.
                   2088:     % An ``uppercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is both nonzero, and
                   2089:     %   not equal to itself.
                   2090:     % Otherwise, we assume it's a number.
                   2091:     %
                   2092:     % We need the \relax at the end of the \ifnum lines to stop TeX from
                   2093:     % continuing to look for a <number>.
                   2094:     %
                   2095:     \ifnum\lccode\expandafter`\thearg=0\relax
                   2096:       \numericenumerate % a number (we hope)
                   2097:     \else
                   2098:       % It's a letter.
                   2099:       \ifnum\lccode\expandafter`\thearg=\expandafter`\thearg\relax
                   2100:         \lowercaseenumerate % lowercase letter
                   2101:       \else
                   2102:         \uppercaseenumerate % uppercase letter
                   2103:       \fi
                   2104:     \fi
                   2105:   \else
                   2106:     % Multiple tokens in the argument.  We hope it's a number.
                   2107:     \numericenumerate
                   2108:   \fi
                   2109: }
                   2110:
                   2111: % An @enumerate whose labels are integers.  The starting integer is
                   2112: % given in \thearg.
                   2113: %
                   2114: \def\numericenumerate{%
                   2115:   \itemno = \thearg
                   2116:   \startenumeration{\the\itemno}%
                   2117: }
                   2118:
                   2119: % The starting (lowercase) letter is in \thearg.
                   2120: \def\lowercaseenumerate{%
                   2121:   \itemno = \expandafter`\thearg
                   2122:   \startenumeration{%
                   2123:     % Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet.
                   2124:     \ifnum\itemno=0
                   2125:       \errmessage{No more lowercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger
                   2126:                   alphabet}%
                   2127:     \fi
                   2128:     \char\lccode\itemno
                   2129:   }%
                   2130: }
                   2131:
                   2132: % The starting (uppercase) letter is in \thearg.
                   2133: \def\uppercaseenumerate{%
                   2134:   \itemno = \expandafter`\thearg
                   2135:   \startenumeration{%
                   2136:     % Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet.
                   2137:     \ifnum\itemno=0
                   2138:       \errmessage{No more uppercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger
                   2139:                   alphabet}
                   2140:     \fi
                   2141:     \char\uccode\itemno
                   2142:   }%
                   2143: }
                   2144:
                   2145: % Call itemizey, adding a period to the first argument and supplying the
                   2146: % common last two arguments.  Also subtract one from the initial value in
                   2147: % \itemno, since @item increments \itemno.
                   2148: %
                   2149: \def\startenumeration#1{%
                   2150:   \advance\itemno by -1
                   2151:   \itemizey{#1.}\Eenumerate\flushcr
                   2152: }
                   2153:
                   2154: % @alphaenumerate and @capsenumerate are abbreviations for giving an arg
                   2155: % to @enumerate.
                   2156: %
                   2157: \def\alphaenumerate{\enumerate{a}}
                   2158: \def\capsenumerate{\enumerate{A}}
                   2159: \def\Ealphaenumerate{\Eenumerate}
                   2160: \def\Ecapsenumerate{\Eenumerate}
                   2161:
                   2162: % Definition of @item while inside @itemize.
                   2163:
                   2164: \def\itemizeitem{%
                   2165: \advance\itemno by 1
                   2166: {\let\par=\endgraf \smallbreak}%
                   2167: \ifhmode \errmessage{In hmode at itemizeitem}\fi
                   2168: {\parskip=0in \hskip 0pt
                   2169: \hbox to 0pt{\hss \itemcontents\hskip \itemmargin}%
                   2170: \vadjust{\penalty 1200}}%
                   2171: \flushcr}
                   2172:
                   2173: % @multitable macros
                   2174: % Amy Hendrickson, 8/18/94, 3/6/96
                   2175: %
                   2176: % @multitable ... @end multitable will make as many columns as desired.
                   2177: % Contents of each column will wrap at width given in preamble.  Width
                   2178: % can be specified either with sample text given in a template line,
                   2179: % or in percent of \hsize, the current width of text on page.
                   2180:
                   2181: % Table can continue over pages but will only break between lines.
                   2182:
                   2183: % To make preamble:
                   2184: %
                   2185: % Either define widths of columns in terms of percent of \hsize:
                   2186: %   @multitable @columnfractions .25 .3 .45
                   2187: %   @item ...
                   2188: %
                   2189: %   Numbers following @columnfractions are the percent of the total
                   2190: %   current hsize to be used for each column. You may use as many
                   2191: %   columns as desired.
                   2192:
                   2193:
                   2194: % Or use a template:
                   2195: %   @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template}
                   2196: %   @item ...
                   2197: %   using the widest term desired in each column.
                   2198: %
                   2199: % For those who want to use more than one line's worth of words in
                   2200: % the preamble, break the line within one argument and it
                   2201: % will parse correctly, i.e.,
                   2202: %
                   2203: %     @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3
                   2204: %      template}
                   2205: % Not:
                   2206: %     @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template}
                   2207: %      {Column 3 template}
                   2208:
                   2209: % Each new table line starts with @item, each subsequent new column
                   2210: % starts with @tab. Empty columns may be produced by supplying @tab's
                   2211: % with nothing between them for as many times as empty columns are needed,
                   2212: % ie, @tab@tab@tab will produce two empty columns.
                   2213:
                   2214: % @item, @tab, @multitable or @end multitable do not need to be on their
                   2215: % own lines, but it will not hurt if they are.
                   2216:
                   2217: % Sample multitable:
                   2218:
                   2219: %   @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template}
                   2220: %   @item first col stuff @tab second col stuff @tab third col
                   2221: %   @item
                   2222: %   first col stuff
                   2223: %   @tab
                   2224: %   second col stuff
                   2225: %   @tab
                   2226: %   third col
                   2227: %   @item first col stuff @tab second col stuff
                   2228: %   @tab Many paragraphs of text may be used in any column.
                   2229: %
                   2230: %         They will wrap at the width determined by the template.
                   2231: %   @item@tab@tab This will be in third column.
                   2232: %   @end multitable
                   2233:
                   2234: % Default dimensions may be reset by user.
                   2235: % @multitableparskip is vertical space between paragraphs in table.
                   2236: % @multitableparindent is paragraph indent in table.
                   2237: % @multitablecolmargin is horizontal space to be left between columns.
                   2238: % @multitablelinespace is space to leave between table items, baseline
                   2239: %                                                            to baseline.
                   2240: %   0pt means it depends on current normal line spacing.
                   2241: %
                   2242: \newskip\multitableparskip
                   2243: \newskip\multitableparindent
                   2244: \newdimen\multitablecolspace
                   2245: \newskip\multitablelinespace
                   2246: \multitableparskip=0pt
                   2247: \multitableparindent=6pt
                   2248: \multitablecolspace=12pt
                   2249: \multitablelinespace=0pt
                   2250:
                   2251: % Macros used to set up halign preamble:
                   2252: %
                   2253: \let\endsetuptable\relax
                   2254: \def\xendsetuptable{\endsetuptable}
                   2255: \let\columnfractions\relax
                   2256: \def\xcolumnfractions{\columnfractions}
                   2257: \newif\ifsetpercent
                   2258:
                   2259: % #1 is the part of the @columnfraction before the decimal point, which
                   2260: % is presumably either 0 or the empty string (but we don't check, we
                   2261: % just throw it away).  #2 is the decimal part, which we use as the
                   2262: % percent of \hsize for this column.
                   2263: \def\pickupwholefraction#1.#2 {%
                   2264:   \global\advance\colcount by 1
                   2265:   \expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{.#2\hsize}%
                   2266:   \setuptable
                   2267: }
                   2268:
                   2269: \newcount\colcount
                   2270: \def\setuptable#1{%
                   2271:   \def\firstarg{#1}%
                   2272:   \ifx\firstarg\xendsetuptable
                   2273:     \let\go = \relax
                   2274:   \else
                   2275:     \ifx\firstarg\xcolumnfractions
                   2276:       \global\setpercenttrue
                   2277:     \else
                   2278:       \ifsetpercent
                   2279:          \let\go\pickupwholefraction
                   2280:       \else
                   2281:          \global\advance\colcount by 1
                   2282:          \setbox0=\hbox{#1\unskip }% Add a normal word space as a separator;
                   2283:                             % typically that is always in the input, anyway.
                   2284:          \expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{\the\wd0}%
                   2285:       \fi
                   2286:     \fi
                   2287:     \ifx\go\pickupwholefraction
                   2288:       % Put the argument back for the \pickupwholefraction call, so
                   2289:       % we'll always have a period there to be parsed.
                   2290:       \def\go{\pickupwholefraction#1}%
                   2291:     \else
                   2292:       \let\go = \setuptable
                   2293:     \fi%
                   2294:   \fi
                   2295:   \go
                   2296: }
                   2297:
                   2298: % This used to have \hskip1sp.  But then the space in a template line is
                   2299: % not enough.  That is bad.  So let's go back to just & until we
                   2300: % encounter the problem it was intended to solve again.
                   2301: % --karl, nathan@acm.org, 20apr99.
                   2302: \def\tab{&}
                   2303:
                   2304: % @multitable ... @end multitable definitions:
                   2305: %
                   2306: \def\multitable{\parsearg\dotable}
                   2307: \def\dotable#1{\bgroup
                   2308:   \vskip\parskip
                   2309:   \let\item\crcr
                   2310:   \tolerance=9500
                   2311:   \hbadness=9500
                   2312:   \setmultitablespacing
                   2313:   \parskip=\multitableparskip
                   2314:   \parindent=\multitableparindent
                   2315:   \overfullrule=0pt
                   2316:   \global\colcount=0
                   2317:   \def\Emultitable{\global\setpercentfalse\cr\egroup\egroup}%
                   2318:   %
                   2319:   % To parse everything between @multitable and @item:
                   2320:   \setuptable#1 \endsetuptable
                   2321:   %
                   2322:   % \everycr will reset column counter, \colcount, at the end of
                   2323:   % each line. Every column entry will cause \colcount to advance by one.
                   2324:   % The table preamble
                   2325:   % looks at the current \colcount to find the correct column width.
                   2326:   \everycr{\noalign{%
                   2327:   %
                   2328:   % \filbreak%% keeps underfull box messages off when table breaks over pages.
                   2329:   % Maybe so, but it also creates really weird page breaks when the table
                   2330:   % breaks over pages. Wouldn't \vfil be better?  Wait until the problem
                   2331:   % manifests itself, so it can be fixed for real --karl.
                   2332:     \global\colcount=0\relax}}%
                   2333:   %
                   2334:   % This preamble sets up a generic column definition, which will
                   2335:   % be used as many times as user calls for columns.
                   2336:   % \vtop will set a single line and will also let text wrap and
                   2337:   % continue for many paragraphs if desired.
                   2338:   \halign\bgroup&\global\advance\colcount by 1\relax
                   2339:     \multistrut\vtop{\hsize=\expandafter\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname
                   2340:   %
                   2341:   % In order to keep entries from bumping into each other
                   2342:   % we will add a \leftskip of \multitablecolspace to all columns after
                   2343:   % the first one.
                   2344:   %
                   2345:   % If a template has been used, we will add \multitablecolspace
                   2346:   % to the width of each template entry.
                   2347:   %
                   2348:   % If the user has set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize we will
                   2349:   % use that dimension as the width of the column, and the \leftskip
                   2350:   % will keep entries from bumping into each other.  Table will start at
                   2351:   % left margin and final column will justify at right margin.
                   2352:   %
                   2353:   % Make sure we don't inherit \rightskip from the outer environment.
                   2354:   \rightskip=0pt
                   2355:   \ifnum\colcount=1
                   2356:     % The first column will be indented with the surrounding text.
                   2357:     \advance\hsize by\leftskip
                   2358:   \else
                   2359:     \ifsetpercent \else
                   2360:       % If user has not set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize
                   2361:       % we will advance \hsize by \multitablecolspace.
                   2362:       \advance\hsize by \multitablecolspace
                   2363:     \fi
                   2364:    % In either case we will make \leftskip=\multitablecolspace:
                   2365:   \leftskip=\multitablecolspace
                   2366:   \fi
                   2367:   % Ignoring space at the beginning and end avoids an occasional spurious
                   2368:   % blank line, when TeX decides to break the line at the space before the
                   2369:   % box from the multistrut, so the strut ends up on a line by itself.
                   2370:   % For example:
                   2371:   % @multitable @columnfractions .11 .89
                   2372:   % @item @code{#}
                   2373:   % @tab Legal holiday which is valid in major parts of the whole country.
                   2374:   % Is automatically provided with highlighting sequences respectively marking
                   2375:   % characters.
                   2376:   \noindent\ignorespaces##\unskip\multistrut}\cr
                   2377: }
                   2378:
                   2379: \def\setmultitablespacing{% test to see if user has set \multitablelinespace.
                   2380: % If so, do nothing. If not, give it an appropriate dimension based on
                   2381: % current baselineskip.
                   2382: \ifdim\multitablelinespace=0pt
                   2383: \setbox0=\vbox{X}\global\multitablelinespace=\the\baselineskip
                   2384: \global\advance\multitablelinespace by-\ht0
                   2385: %% strut to put in table in case some entry doesn't have descenders,
                   2386: %% to keep lines equally spaced
                   2387: \let\multistrut = \strut
                   2388: \else
                   2389: %% FIXME: what is \box0 supposed to be?
                   2390: \gdef\multistrut{\vrule height\multitablelinespace depth\dp0
                   2391: width0pt\relax} \fi
                   2392: %% Test to see if parskip is larger than space between lines of
                   2393: %% table. If not, do nothing.
                   2394: %%        If so, set to same dimension as multitablelinespace.
                   2395: \ifdim\multitableparskip>\multitablelinespace
                   2396: \global\multitableparskip=\multitablelinespace
                   2397: \global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt %% to keep parskip somewhat smaller
                   2398:                                       %% than skip between lines in the table.
                   2399: \fi%
                   2400: \ifdim\multitableparskip=0pt
                   2401: \global\multitableparskip=\multitablelinespace
                   2402: \global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt %% to keep parskip somewhat smaller
                   2403:                                       %% than skip between lines in the table.
                   2404: \fi}
                   2405:
                   2406:
                   2407: \message{conditionals,}
                   2408: % Prevent errors for section commands.
                   2409: % Used in @ignore and in failing conditionals.
                   2410: \def\ignoresections{%
                   2411:   \let\chapter=\relax
                   2412:   \let\unnumbered=\relax
                   2413:   \let\top=\relax
                   2414:   \let\unnumberedsec=\relax
                   2415:   \let\unnumberedsection=\relax
                   2416:   \let\unnumberedsubsec=\relax
                   2417:   \let\unnumberedsubsection=\relax
                   2418:   \let\unnumberedsubsubsec=\relax
                   2419:   \let\unnumberedsubsubsection=\relax
                   2420:   \let\section=\relax
                   2421:   \let\subsec=\relax
                   2422:   \let\subsubsec=\relax
                   2423:   \let\subsection=\relax
                   2424:   \let\subsubsection=\relax
                   2425:   \let\appendix=\relax
                   2426:   \let\appendixsec=\relax
                   2427:   \let\appendixsection=\relax
                   2428:   \let\appendixsubsec=\relax
                   2429:   \let\appendixsubsection=\relax
                   2430:   \let\appendixsubsubsec=\relax
                   2431:   \let\appendixsubsubsection=\relax
                   2432:   \let\contents=\relax
                   2433:   \let\smallbook=\relax
                   2434:   \let\titlepage=\relax
                   2435: }
                   2436:
                   2437: % Used in nested conditionals, where we have to parse the Texinfo source
                   2438: % and so want to turn off most commands, in case they are used
                   2439: % incorrectly.
                   2440: %
                   2441: \def\ignoremorecommands{%
                   2442:   \let\defcodeindex = \relax
                   2443:   \let\defcv = \relax
                   2444:   \let\deffn = \relax
                   2445:   \let\deffnx = \relax
                   2446:   \let\defindex = \relax
                   2447:   \let\defivar = \relax
                   2448:   \let\defmac = \relax
                   2449:   \let\defmethod = \relax
                   2450:   \let\defop = \relax
                   2451:   \let\defopt = \relax
                   2452:   \let\defspec = \relax
                   2453:   \let\deftp = \relax
                   2454:   \let\deftypefn = \relax
                   2455:   \let\deftypefun = \relax
                   2456:   \let\deftypeivar = \relax
                   2457:   \let\deftypeop = \relax
                   2458:   \let\deftypevar = \relax
                   2459:   \let\deftypevr = \relax
                   2460:   \let\defun = \relax
                   2461:   \let\defvar = \relax
                   2462:   \let\defvr = \relax
                   2463:   \let\ref = \relax
                   2464:   \let\xref = \relax
                   2465:   \let\printindex = \relax
                   2466:   \let\pxref = \relax
                   2467:   \let\settitle = \relax
                   2468:   \let\setchapternewpage = \relax
                   2469:   \let\setchapterstyle = \relax
                   2470:   \let\everyheading = \relax
                   2471:   \let\evenheading = \relax
                   2472:   \let\oddheading = \relax
                   2473:   \let\everyfooting = \relax
                   2474:   \let\evenfooting = \relax
                   2475:   \let\oddfooting = \relax
                   2476:   \let\headings = \relax
                   2477:   \let\include = \relax
                   2478:   \let\lowersections = \relax
                   2479:   \let\down = \relax
                   2480:   \let\raisesections = \relax
                   2481:   \let\up = \relax
                   2482:   \let\set = \relax
                   2483:   \let\clear = \relax
                   2484:   \let\item = \relax
                   2485: }
                   2486:
                   2487: % Ignore @ignore ... @end ignore.
                   2488: %
                   2489: \def\ignore{\doignore{ignore}}
                   2490:
                   2491: % Ignore @ifinfo, @ifhtml, @ifnottex, @html, @menu, and @direntry text.
                   2492: %
                   2493: \def\ifinfo{\doignore{ifinfo}}
                   2494: \def\ifhtml{\doignore{ifhtml}}
                   2495: \def\ifnottex{\doignore{ifnottex}}
                   2496: \def\html{\doignore{html}}
                   2497: \def\menu{\doignore{menu}}
                   2498: \def\direntry{\doignore{direntry}}
                   2499:
                   2500: % @dircategory CATEGORY  -- specify a category of the dir file
                   2501: % which this file should belong to.  Ignore this in TeX.
                   2502: \let\dircategory = \comment
                   2503:
                   2504: % Ignore text until a line `@end #1'.
                   2505: %
                   2506: \def\doignore#1{\begingroup
                   2507:   % Don't complain about control sequences we have declared \outer.
                   2508:   \ignoresections
                   2509:   %
                   2510:   % Define a command to swallow text until we reach `@end #1'.
                   2511:   % This @ is a catcode 12 token (that is the normal catcode of @ in
                   2512:   % this texinfo.tex file).  We change the catcode of @ below to match.
                   2513:   \long\def\doignoretext##1@end #1{\enddoignore}%
                   2514:   %
                   2515:   % Make sure that spaces turn into tokens that match what \doignoretext wants.
                   2516:   \catcode32 = 10
                   2517:   %
                   2518:   % Ignore braces, too, so mismatched braces don't cause trouble.
                   2519:   \catcode`\{ = 9
                   2520:   \catcode`\} = 9
                   2521:   %
                   2522:   % We must not have @c interpreted as a control sequence.
                   2523:   \catcode`\@ = 12
                   2524:   %
                   2525:   % Make the letter c a comment character so that the rest of the line
                   2526:   % will be ignored. This way, the document can have (for example)
                   2527:   %   @c @end ifinfo
                   2528:   % and the @end ifinfo will be properly ignored.
                   2529:   % (We've just changed @ to catcode 12.)
                   2530:   \catcode`\c = 14
                   2531:   %
                   2532:   % And now expand that command.
                   2533:   \doignoretext
                   2534: }
                   2535:
                   2536: % What we do to finish off ignored text.
                   2537: %
                   2538: \def\enddoignore{\endgroup\ignorespaces}%
                   2539:
                   2540: \newif\ifwarnedobs\warnedobsfalse
                   2541: \def\obstexwarn{%
                   2542:   \ifwarnedobs\relax\else
                   2543:   % We need to warn folks that they may have trouble with TeX 3.0.
                   2544:   % This uses \immediate\write16 rather than \message to get newlines.
                   2545:     \immediate\write16{}
                   2546:     \immediate\write16{WARNING: for users of Unix TeX 3.0!}
                   2547:     \immediate\write16{This manual trips a bug in TeX version 3.0 (tex hangs).}
                   2548:     \immediate\write16{If you are running another version of TeX, relax.}
                   2549:     \immediate\write16{If you are running Unix TeX 3.0, kill this TeX process.}
                   2550:     \immediate\write16{  Then upgrade your TeX installation if you can.}
                   2551:     \immediate\write16{  (See ftp://ftp.gnu.org/pub/gnu/TeX.README.)}
                   2552:     \immediate\write16{If you are stuck with version 3.0, run the}
                   2553:     \immediate\write16{  script ``tex3patch'' from the Texinfo distribution}
                   2554:     \immediate\write16{  to use a workaround.}
                   2555:     \immediate\write16{}
                   2556:     \global\warnedobstrue
                   2557:     \fi
                   2558: }
                   2559:
                   2560: % **In TeX 3.0, setting text in \nullfont hangs tex.  For a
                   2561: % workaround (which requires the file ``dummy.tfm'' to be installed),
                   2562: % uncomment the following line:
                   2563: %%%%%\font\nullfont=dummy\let\obstexwarn=\relax
                   2564:
                   2565: % Ignore text, except that we keep track of conditional commands for
                   2566: % purposes of nesting, up to an `@end #1' command.
                   2567: %
                   2568: \def\nestedignore#1{%
                   2569:   \obstexwarn
                   2570:   % We must actually expand the ignored text to look for the @end
                   2571:   % command, so that nested ignore constructs work.  Thus, we put the
                   2572:   % text into a \vbox and then do nothing with the result.  To minimize
                   2573:   % the change of memory overflow, we follow the approach outlined on
                   2574:   % page 401 of the TeXbook: make the current font be a dummy font.
                   2575:   %
                   2576:   \setbox0 = \vbox\bgroup
                   2577:     % Don't complain about control sequences we have declared \outer.
                   2578:     \ignoresections
                   2579:     %
                   2580:     % Define `@end #1' to end the box, which will in turn undefine the
                   2581:     % @end command again.
                   2582:     \expandafter\def\csname E#1\endcsname{\egroup\ignorespaces}%
                   2583:     %
                   2584:     % We are going to be parsing Texinfo commands.  Most cause no
                   2585:     % trouble when they are used incorrectly, but some commands do
                   2586:     % complicated argument parsing or otherwise get confused, so we
                   2587:     % undefine them.
                   2588:     %
                   2589:     % We can't do anything about stray @-signs, unfortunately;
                   2590:     % they'll produce `undefined control sequence' errors.
                   2591:     \ignoremorecommands
                   2592:     %
                   2593:     % Set the current font to be \nullfont, a TeX primitive, and define
                   2594:     % all the font commands to also use \nullfont.  We don't use
                   2595:     % dummy.tfm, as suggested in the TeXbook, because not all sites
                   2596:     % might have that installed.  Therefore, math mode will still
                   2597:     % produce output, but that should be an extremely small amount of
                   2598:     % stuff compared to the main input.
                   2599:     %
                   2600:     \nullfont
                   2601:     \let\tenrm=\nullfont \let\tenit=\nullfont \let\tensl=\nullfont
                   2602:     \let\tenbf=\nullfont \let\tentt=\nullfont \let\smallcaps=\nullfont
                   2603:     \let\tensf=\nullfont
                   2604:     % Similarly for index fonts (mostly for their use in smallexample).
                   2605:     \let\smallrm=\nullfont \let\smallit=\nullfont \let\smallsl=\nullfont
                   2606:     \let\smallbf=\nullfont \let\smalltt=\nullfont \let\smallsc=\nullfont
                   2607:     \let\smallsf=\nullfont
                   2608:     %
                   2609:     % Don't complain when characters are missing from the fonts.
                   2610:     \tracinglostchars = 0
                   2611:     %
                   2612:     % Don't bother to do space factor calculations.
                   2613:     \frenchspacing
                   2614:     %
                   2615:     % Don't report underfull hboxes.
                   2616:     \hbadness = 10000
                   2617:     %
                   2618:     % Do minimal line-breaking.
                   2619:     \pretolerance = 10000
                   2620:     %
                   2621:     % Do not execute instructions in @tex
                   2622:     \def\tex{\doignore{tex}}%
                   2623:     % Do not execute macro definitions.
                   2624:     % `c' is a comment character, so the word `macro' will get cut off.
                   2625:     \def\macro{\doignore{ma}}%
                   2626: }
                   2627:
                   2628: % @set VAR sets the variable VAR to an empty value.
                   2629: % @set VAR REST-OF-LINE sets VAR to the value REST-OF-LINE.
                   2630: %
                   2631: % Since we want to separate VAR from REST-OF-LINE (which might be
                   2632: % empty), we can't just use \parsearg; we have to insert a space of our
                   2633: % own to delimit the rest of the line, and then take it out again if we
                   2634: % didn't need it.  Make sure the catcode of space is correct to avoid
                   2635: % losing inside @example, for instance.
                   2636: %
                   2637: \def\set{\begingroup\catcode` =10
                   2638:   \catcode`\-=12 \catcode`\_=12 % Allow - and _ in VAR.
                   2639:   \parsearg\setxxx}
                   2640: \def\setxxx#1{\setyyy#1 \endsetyyy}
                   2641: \def\setyyy#1 #2\endsetyyy{%
                   2642:   \def\temp{#2}%
                   2643:   \ifx\temp\empty \global\expandafter\let\csname SET#1\endcsname = \empty
                   2644:   \else \setzzz{#1}#2\endsetzzz % Remove the trailing space \setxxx inserted.
                   2645:   \fi
                   2646:   \endgroup
                   2647: }
                   2648: % Can't use \xdef to pre-expand #2 and save some time, since \temp or
                   2649: % \next or other control sequences that we've defined might get us into
                   2650: % an infinite loop. Consider `@set foo @cite{bar}'.
                   2651: \def\setzzz#1#2 \endsetzzz{\expandafter\gdef\csname SET#1\endcsname{#2}}
                   2652:
                   2653: % @clear VAR clears (i.e., unsets) the variable VAR.
                   2654: %
                   2655: \def\clear{\parsearg\clearxxx}
                   2656: \def\clearxxx#1{\global\expandafter\let\csname SET#1\endcsname=\relax}
                   2657:
                   2658: % @value{foo} gets the text saved in variable foo.
                   2659: {
                   2660:   \catcode`\_ = \active
                   2661:   %
                   2662:   % We might end up with active _ or - characters in the argument if
                   2663:   % we're called from @code, as @code{@value{foo-bar_}}.  So \let any
                   2664:   % such active characters to their normal equivalents.
                   2665:   \gdef\value{\begingroup
                   2666:     \catcode`\-=12 \catcode`\_=12
                   2667:     \indexbreaks \let_\normalunderscore
                   2668:     \valuexxx}
                   2669: }
                   2670: \def\valuexxx#1{\expandablevalue{#1}\endgroup}
                   2671:
                   2672: % We have this subroutine so that we can handle at least some @value's
                   2673: % properly in indexes (we \let\value to this in \indexdummies).  Ones
                   2674: % whose names contain - or _ still won't work, but we can't do anything
                   2675: % about that.  The command has to be fully expandable, since the result
                   2676: % winds up in the index file.  This means that if the variable's value
                   2677: % contains other Texinfo commands, it's almost certain it will fail
                   2678: % (although perhaps we could fix that with sufficient work to do a
                   2679: % one-level expansion on the result, instead of complete).
                   2680: %
                   2681: \def\expandablevalue#1{%
                   2682:   \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax
                   2683:     {[No value for ``#1'']}%
                   2684:   \else
                   2685:     \csname SET#1\endcsname
                   2686:   \fi
                   2687: }
                   2688:
                   2689: % @ifset VAR ... @end ifset reads the `...' iff VAR has been defined
                   2690: % with @set.
                   2691: %
                   2692: \def\ifset{\parsearg\ifsetxxx}
                   2693: \def\ifsetxxx #1{%
                   2694:   \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax
                   2695:     \expandafter\ifsetfail
                   2696:   \else
                   2697:     \expandafter\ifsetsucceed
                   2698:   \fi
                   2699: }
                   2700: \def\ifsetsucceed{\conditionalsucceed{ifset}}
                   2701: \def\ifsetfail{\nestedignore{ifset}}
                   2702: \defineunmatchedend{ifset}
                   2703:
                   2704: % @ifclear VAR ... @end ifclear reads the `...' iff VAR has never been
                   2705: % defined with @set, or has been undefined with @clear.
                   2706: %
                   2707: \def\ifclear{\parsearg\ifclearxxx}
                   2708: \def\ifclearxxx #1{%
                   2709:   \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax
                   2710:     \expandafter\ifclearsucceed
                   2711:   \else
                   2712:     \expandafter\ifclearfail
                   2713:   \fi
                   2714: }
                   2715: \def\ifclearsucceed{\conditionalsucceed{ifclear}}
                   2716: \def\ifclearfail{\nestedignore{ifclear}}
                   2717: \defineunmatchedend{ifclear}
                   2718:
                   2719: % @iftex, @ifnothtml, @ifnotinfo always succeed; we read the text
                   2720: % following, through the first @end iftex (etc.).  Make `@end iftex'
                   2721: % (etc.) valid only after an @iftex.
                   2722: %
                   2723: \def\iftex{\conditionalsucceed{iftex}}
                   2724: \def\ifnothtml{\conditionalsucceed{ifnothtml}}
                   2725: \def\ifnotinfo{\conditionalsucceed{ifnotinfo}}
                   2726: \defineunmatchedend{iftex}
                   2727: \defineunmatchedend{ifnothtml}
                   2728: \defineunmatchedend{ifnotinfo}
                   2729:
                   2730: % We can't just want to start a group at @iftex (for example) and end it
                   2731: % at @end iftex, since then @set commands inside the conditional have no
                   2732: % effect (they'd get reverted at the end of the group).  So we must
                   2733: % define \Eiftex to redefine itself to be its previous value.  (We can't
                   2734: % just define it to fail again with an ``unmatched end'' error, since
                   2735: % the @ifset might be nested.)
                   2736: %
                   2737: \def\conditionalsucceed#1{%
                   2738:   \edef\temp{%
                   2739:     % Remember the current value of \E#1.
                   2740:     \let\nece{prevE#1} = \nece{E#1}%
                   2741:     %
                   2742:     % At the `@end #1', redefine \E#1 to be its previous value.
                   2743:     \def\nece{E#1}{\let\nece{E#1} = \nece{prevE#1}}%
                   2744:   }%
                   2745:   \temp
                   2746: }
                   2747:
                   2748: % We need to expand lots of \csname's, but we don't want to expand the
                   2749: % control sequences after we've constructed them.
                   2750: %
                   2751: \def\nece#1{\expandafter\noexpand\csname#1\endcsname}
                   2752:
                   2753: % @defininfoenclose.
                   2754: \let\definfoenclose=\comment
                   2755:
                   2756:
                   2757: \message{indexing,}
                   2758: % Index generation facilities
                   2759:
                   2760: % Define \newwrite to be identical to plain tex's \newwrite
                   2761: % except not \outer, so it can be used within \newindex.
                   2762: {\catcode`\@=11
                   2763: \gdef\newwrite{\alloc@7\write\chardef\sixt@@n}}
                   2764:
                   2765: % \newindex {foo} defines an index named foo.
                   2766: % It automatically defines \fooindex such that
                   2767: % \fooindex ...rest of line... puts an entry in the index foo.
                   2768: % It also defines \fooindfile to be the number of the output channel for
                   2769: % the file that accumulates this index.  The file's extension is foo.
                   2770: % The name of an index should be no more than 2 characters long
                   2771: % for the sake of vms.
                   2772: %
                   2773: \def\newindex#1{%
                   2774:   \iflinks
                   2775:     \expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname
                   2776:     \openout \csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.#1 % Open the file
                   2777:   \fi
                   2778:   \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{%     % Define @#1index
                   2779:     \noexpand\doindex{#1}}
                   2780: }
                   2781:
                   2782: % @defindex foo  ==  \newindex{foo}
                   2783:
                   2784: \def\defindex{\parsearg\newindex}
                   2785:
                   2786: % Define @defcodeindex, like @defindex except put all entries in @code.
                   2787:
                   2788: \def\newcodeindex#1{%
                   2789:   \iflinks
                   2790:     \expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname
                   2791:     \openout \csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.#1
                   2792:   \fi
                   2793:   \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{%
                   2794:     \noexpand\docodeindex{#1}}
                   2795: }
                   2796:
                   2797: \def\defcodeindex{\parsearg\newcodeindex}
                   2798:
                   2799: % @synindex foo bar    makes index foo feed into index bar.
                   2800: % Do this instead of @defindex foo if you don't want it as a separate index.
                   2801: % The \closeout helps reduce unnecessary open files; the limit on the
                   2802: % Acorn RISC OS is a mere 16 files.
                   2803: \def\synindex#1 #2 {%
                   2804:   \expandafter\let\expandafter\synindexfoo\expandafter=\csname#2indfile\endcsname
                   2805:   \expandafter\closeout\csname#1indfile\endcsname
                   2806:   \expandafter\let\csname#1indfile\endcsname=\synindexfoo
                   2807:   \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{% define \xxxindex
                   2808:     \noexpand\doindex{#2}}%
                   2809: }
                   2810:
                   2811: % @syncodeindex foo bar   similar, but put all entries made for index foo
                   2812: % inside @code.
                   2813: \def\syncodeindex#1 #2 {%
                   2814:   \expandafter\let\expandafter\synindexfoo\expandafter=\csname#2indfile\endcsname
                   2815:   \expandafter\closeout\csname#1indfile\endcsname
                   2816:   \expandafter\let\csname#1indfile\endcsname=\synindexfoo
                   2817:   \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{% define \xxxindex
                   2818:     \noexpand\docodeindex{#2}}%
                   2819: }
                   2820:
                   2821: % Define \doindex, the driver for all \fooindex macros.
                   2822: % Argument #1 is generated by the calling \fooindex macro,
                   2823: %  and it is "foo", the name of the index.
                   2824:
                   2825: % \doindex just uses \parsearg; it calls \doind for the actual work.
                   2826: % This is because \doind is more useful to call from other macros.
                   2827:
                   2828: % There is also \dosubind {index}{topic}{subtopic}
                   2829: % which makes an entry in a two-level index such as the operation index.
                   2830:
                   2831: \def\doindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\singleindexer}
                   2832: \def\singleindexer #1{\doind{\indexname}{#1}}
                   2833:
                   2834: % like the previous two, but they put @code around the argument.
                   2835: \def\docodeindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\singlecodeindexer}
                   2836: \def\singlecodeindexer #1{\doind{\indexname}{\code{#1}}}
                   2837:
                   2838: \def\indexdummies{%
                   2839: \def\ { }%
                   2840: % Take care of the plain tex accent commands.
                   2841: \def\"{\realbackslash "}%
                   2842: \def\`{\realbackslash `}%
                   2843: \def\'{\realbackslash '}%
                   2844: \def\^{\realbackslash ^}%
                   2845: \def\~{\realbackslash ~}%
                   2846: \def\={\realbackslash =}%
                   2847: \def\b{\realbackslash b}%
                   2848: \def\c{\realbackslash c}%
                   2849: \def\d{\realbackslash d}%
                   2850: \def\u{\realbackslash u}%
                   2851: \def\v{\realbackslash v}%
                   2852: \def\H{\realbackslash H}%
                   2853: % Take care of the plain tex special European modified letters.
                   2854: \def\oe{\realbackslash oe}%
                   2855: \def\ae{\realbackslash ae}%
                   2856: \def\aa{\realbackslash aa}%
                   2857: \def\OE{\realbackslash OE}%
                   2858: \def\AE{\realbackslash AE}%
                   2859: \def\AA{\realbackslash AA}%
                   2860: \def\o{\realbackslash o}%
                   2861: \def\O{\realbackslash O}%
                   2862: \def\l{\realbackslash l}%
                   2863: \def\L{\realbackslash L}%
                   2864: \def\ss{\realbackslash ss}%
                   2865: % Take care of texinfo commands likely to appear in an index entry.
                   2866: % (Must be a way to avoid doing expansion at all, and thus not have to
                   2867: % laboriously list every single command here.)
                   2868: \def\@{@}% will be @@ when we switch to @ as escape char.
                   2869: % Need these in case \tex is in effect and \{ is a \delimiter again.
                   2870: % But can't use \lbracecmd and \rbracecmd because texindex assumes
                   2871: % braces and backslashes are used only as delimiters.
                   2872: \let\{ = \mylbrace
                   2873: \let\} = \myrbrace
                   2874: \def\_{{\realbackslash _}}%
                   2875: \def\w{\realbackslash w }%
                   2876: \def\bf{\realbackslash bf }%
                   2877: %\def\rm{\realbackslash rm }%
                   2878: \def\sl{\realbackslash sl }%
                   2879: \def\sf{\realbackslash sf}%
                   2880: \def\tt{\realbackslash tt}%
                   2881: \def\gtr{\realbackslash gtr}%
                   2882: \def\less{\realbackslash less}%
                   2883: \def\hat{\realbackslash hat}%
                   2884: \def\TeX{\realbackslash TeX}%
                   2885: \def\dots{\realbackslash dots }%
                   2886: \def\result{\realbackslash result}%
                   2887: \def\equiv{\realbackslash equiv}%
                   2888: \def\expansion{\realbackslash expansion}%
                   2889: \def\print{\realbackslash print}%
                   2890: \def\error{\realbackslash error}%
                   2891: \def\point{\realbackslash point}%
                   2892: \def\copyright{\realbackslash copyright}%
                   2893: \def\tclose##1{\realbackslash tclose {##1}}%
                   2894: \def\code##1{\realbackslash code {##1}}%
                   2895: \def\uref##1{\realbackslash uref {##1}}%
                   2896: \def\url##1{\realbackslash url {##1}}%
                   2897: \def\env##1{\realbackslash env {##1}}%
                   2898: \def\command##1{\realbackslash command {##1}}%
                   2899: \def\option##1{\realbackslash option {##1}}%
                   2900: \def\dotless##1{\realbackslash dotless {##1}}%
                   2901: \def\samp##1{\realbackslash samp {##1}}%
                   2902: \def\,##1{\realbackslash ,{##1}}%
                   2903: \def\t##1{\realbackslash t {##1}}%
                   2904: \def\r##1{\realbackslash r {##1}}%
                   2905: \def\i##1{\realbackslash i {##1}}%
                   2906: \def\b##1{\realbackslash b {##1}}%
                   2907: \def\sc##1{\realbackslash sc {##1}}%
                   2908: \def\cite##1{\realbackslash cite {##1}}%
                   2909: \def\key##1{\realbackslash key {##1}}%
                   2910: \def\file##1{\realbackslash file {##1}}%
                   2911: \def\var##1{\realbackslash var {##1}}%
                   2912: \def\kbd##1{\realbackslash kbd {##1}}%
                   2913: \def\dfn##1{\realbackslash dfn {##1}}%
                   2914: \def\emph##1{\realbackslash emph {##1}}%
                   2915: \def\acronym##1{\realbackslash acronym {##1}}%
                   2916: %
                   2917: % Handle some cases of @value -- where the variable name does not
                   2918: % contain - or _, and the value does not contain any
                   2919: % (non-fully-expandable) commands.
                   2920: \let\value = \expandablevalue
                   2921: %
                   2922: \unsepspaces
                   2923: % Turn off macro expansion
                   2924: \turnoffmacros
                   2925: }
                   2926:
                   2927: % If an index command is used in an @example environment, any spaces
                   2928: % therein should become regular spaces in the raw index file, not the
                   2929: % expansion of \tie (\\leavevmode \penalty \@M \ ).
                   2930: {\obeyspaces
                   2931:  \gdef\unsepspaces{\obeyspaces\let =\space}}
                   2932:
                   2933: % \indexnofonts no-ops all font-change commands.
                   2934: % This is used when outputting the strings to sort the index by.
                   2935: \def\indexdummyfont#1{#1}
                   2936: \def\indexdummytex{TeX}
                   2937: \def\indexdummydots{...}
                   2938:
                   2939: \def\indexnofonts{%
                   2940: % Just ignore accents.
                   2941: \let\,=\indexdummyfont
                   2942: \let\"=\indexdummyfont
                   2943: \let\`=\indexdummyfont
                   2944: \let\'=\indexdummyfont
                   2945: \let\^=\indexdummyfont
                   2946: \let\~=\indexdummyfont
                   2947: \let\==\indexdummyfont
                   2948: \let\b=\indexdummyfont
                   2949: \let\c=\indexdummyfont
                   2950: \let\d=\indexdummyfont
                   2951: \let\u=\indexdummyfont
                   2952: \let\v=\indexdummyfont
                   2953: \let\H=\indexdummyfont
                   2954: \let\dotless=\indexdummyfont
                   2955: % Take care of the plain tex special European modified letters.
                   2956: \def\oe{oe}%
                   2957: \def\ae{ae}%
                   2958: \def\aa{aa}%
                   2959: \def\OE{OE}%
                   2960: \def\AE{AE}%
                   2961: \def\AA{AA}%
                   2962: \def\o{o}%
                   2963: \def\O{O}%
                   2964: \def\l{l}%
                   2965: \def\L{L}%
                   2966: \def\ss{ss}%
                   2967: \let\w=\indexdummyfont
                   2968: \let\t=\indexdummyfont
                   2969: \let\r=\indexdummyfont
                   2970: \let\i=\indexdummyfont
                   2971: \let\b=\indexdummyfont
                   2972: \let\emph=\indexdummyfont
                   2973: \let\strong=\indexdummyfont
                   2974: \let\cite=\indexdummyfont
                   2975: \let\sc=\indexdummyfont
                   2976: %Don't no-op \tt, since it isn't a user-level command
                   2977: % and is used in the definitions of the active chars like <, >, |...
                   2978: %\let\tt=\indexdummyfont
                   2979: \let\tclose=\indexdummyfont
                   2980: \let\code=\indexdummyfont
                   2981: \let\url=\indexdummyfont
                   2982: \let\uref=\indexdummyfont
                   2983: \let\env=\indexdummyfont
                   2984: \let\acronym=\indexdummyfont
                   2985: \let\command=\indexdummyfont
                   2986: \let\option=\indexdummyfont
                   2987: \let\file=\indexdummyfont
                   2988: \let\samp=\indexdummyfont
                   2989: \let\kbd=\indexdummyfont
                   2990: \let\key=\indexdummyfont
                   2991: \let\var=\indexdummyfont
                   2992: \let\TeX=\indexdummytex
                   2993: \let\dots=\indexdummydots
                   2994: \def\@{@}%
                   2995: }
                   2996:
                   2997: % To define \realbackslash, we must make \ not be an escape.
                   2998: % We must first make another character (@) an escape
                   2999: % so we do not become unable to do a definition.
                   3000:
                   3001: {\catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=\other
                   3002:  @gdef@realbackslash{\}}
                   3003:
                   3004: \let\indexbackslash=0  %overridden during \printindex.
                   3005: \let\SETmarginindex=\relax % put index entries in margin (undocumented)?
                   3006:
                   3007: % For \ifx comparisons.
                   3008: \def\emptymacro{\empty}
                   3009:
                   3010: % Most index entries go through here, but \dosubind is the general case.
                   3011: %
                   3012: \def\doind#1#2{\dosubind{#1}{#2}\empty}
                   3013:
                   3014: % Workhorse for all \fooindexes.
                   3015: % #1 is name of index, #2 is stuff to put there, #3 is subentry --
                   3016: % \empty if called from \doind, as we usually are.  The main exception
                   3017: % is with defuns, which call us directly.
                   3018: %
                   3019: \def\dosubind#1#2#3{%
                   3020:   % Put the index entry in the margin if desired.
                   3021:   \ifx\SETmarginindex\relax\else
                   3022:     \insert\margin{\hbox{\vrule height8pt depth3pt width0pt #2}}%
                   3023:   \fi
                   3024:   {%
                   3025:     \count255=\lastpenalty
                   3026:     {%
                   3027:       \indexdummies % Must do this here, since \bf, etc expand at this stage
                   3028:       \escapechar=`\\
                   3029:       {%
                   3030:         \let\folio = 0% We will expand all macros now EXCEPT \folio.
                   3031:         \def\rawbackslashxx{\indexbackslash}% \indexbackslash isn't defined now
                   3032:         % so it will be output as is; and it will print as backslash.
                   3033:         %
                   3034:         \def\thirdarg{#3}%
                   3035:         %
                   3036:         % If third arg is present, precede it with space in sort key.
                   3037:         \ifx\thirdarg\emptymacro
                   3038:           \let\subentry = \empty
                   3039:         \else
                   3040:           \def\subentry{ #3}%
                   3041:         \fi
                   3042:         %
                   3043:         % First process the index entry with all font commands turned
                   3044:         % off to get the string to sort by.
                   3045:         {\indexnofonts \xdef\indexsorttmp{#2\subentry}}%
                   3046:         %
                   3047:         % Now the real index entry with the fonts.
                   3048:         \toks0 = {#2}%
                   3049:         %
                   3050:         % If third (subentry) arg is present, add it to the index
                   3051:         % string.  And include a space.
                   3052:         \ifx\thirdarg\emptymacro \else
                   3053:           \toks0 = \expandafter{\the\toks0 \space #3}%
                   3054:         \fi
                   3055:         %
                   3056:         % Set up the complete index entry, with both the sort key
                   3057:         % and the original text, including any font commands.  We write
                   3058:         % three arguments to \entry to the .?? file, texindex reduces to
                   3059:         % two when writing the .??s sorted result.
                   3060:         \edef\temp{%
                   3061:           \write\csname#1indfile\endcsname{%
                   3062:             \realbackslash entry{\indexsorttmp}{\folio}{\the\toks0}}%
                   3063:         }%
                   3064:         %
                   3065:         % If a skip is the last thing on the list now, preserve it
                   3066:         % by backing up by \lastskip, doing the \write, then inserting
                   3067:         % the skip again.  Otherwise, the whatsit generated by the
                   3068:         % \write will make \lastskip zero.  The result is that sequences
                   3069:         % like this:
                   3070:         % @end defun
                   3071:         % @tindex whatever
                   3072:         % @defun ...
                   3073:         % will have extra space inserted, because the \medbreak in the
                   3074:         % start of the @defun won't see the skip inserted by the @end of
                   3075:         % the previous defun.
                   3076:         %
                   3077:         % But don't do any of this if we're not in vertical mode.  We
                   3078:         % don't want to do a \vskip and prematurely end a paragraph.
                   3079:         %
                   3080:         % Avoid page breaks due to these extra skips, too.
                   3081:         %
                   3082:         \iflinks
                   3083:           \ifvmode
                   3084:             \skip0 = \lastskip
                   3085:             \ifdim\lastskip = 0pt \else \nobreak\vskip-\lastskip \fi
                   3086:           \fi
                   3087:           %
                   3088:           \temp % do the write
                   3089:           %
                   3090:           %
                   3091:           \ifvmode \ifdim\skip0 = 0pt \else \nobreak\vskip\skip0 \fi \fi
                   3092:         \fi
                   3093:       }%
                   3094:     }%
                   3095:     \penalty\count255
                   3096:   }%
                   3097: }
                   3098:
                   3099: % The index entry written in the file actually looks like
                   3100: %  \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic}
                   3101: % or
                   3102: %  \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic}{subtopic}
                   3103: % The texindex program reads in these files and writes files
                   3104: % containing these kinds of lines:
                   3105: %  \initial {c}
                   3106: %     before the first topic whose initial is c
                   3107: %  \entry {topic}{pagelist}
                   3108: %     for a topic that is used without subtopics
                   3109: %  \primary {topic}
                   3110: %     for the beginning of a topic that is used with subtopics
                   3111: %  \secondary {subtopic}{pagelist}
                   3112: %     for each subtopic.
                   3113:
                   3114: % Define the user-accessible indexing commands
                   3115: % @findex, @vindex, @kindex, @cindex.
                   3116:
                   3117: \def\findex {\fnindex}
                   3118: \def\kindex {\kyindex}
                   3119: \def\cindex {\cpindex}
                   3120: \def\vindex {\vrindex}
                   3121: \def\tindex {\tpindex}
                   3122: \def\pindex {\pgindex}
                   3123:
                   3124: \def\cindexsub {\begingroup\obeylines\cindexsub}
                   3125: {\obeylines %
                   3126: \gdef\cindexsub "#1" #2^^M{\endgroup %
                   3127: \dosubind{cp}{#2}{#1}}}
                   3128:
                   3129: % Define the macros used in formatting output of the sorted index material.
                   3130:
                   3131: % @printindex causes a particular index (the ??s file) to get printed.
                   3132: % It does not print any chapter heading (usually an @unnumbered).
                   3133: %
                   3134: \def\printindex{\parsearg\doprintindex}
                   3135: \def\doprintindex#1{\begingroup
                   3136:   \dobreak \chapheadingskip{10000}%
                   3137:   %
                   3138:   \smallfonts \rm
                   3139:   \tolerance = 9500
                   3140:   \indexbreaks
                   3141:   %
                   3142:   % See if the index file exists and is nonempty.
                   3143:   % Change catcode of @ here so that if the index file contains
                   3144:   % \initial {@}
                   3145:   % as its first line, TeX doesn't complain about mismatched braces
                   3146:   % (because it thinks @} is a control sequence).
                   3147:   \catcode`\@ = 11
                   3148:   \openin 1 \jobname.#1s
                   3149:   \ifeof 1
                   3150:     % \enddoublecolumns gets confused if there is no text in the index,
                   3151:     % and it loses the chapter title and the aux file entries for the
                   3152:     % index.  The easiest way to prevent this problem is to make sure
                   3153:     % there is some text.
                   3154:     \putwordIndexNonexistent
                   3155:   \else
                   3156:     %
                   3157:     % If the index file exists but is empty, then \openin leaves \ifeof
                   3158:     % false.  We have to make TeX try to read something from the file, so
                   3159:     % it can discover if there is anything in it.
                   3160:     \read 1 to \temp
                   3161:     \ifeof 1
                   3162:       \putwordIndexIsEmpty
                   3163:     \else
                   3164:       % Index files are almost Texinfo source, but we use \ as the escape
                   3165:       % character.  It would be better to use @, but that's too big a change
                   3166:       % to make right now.
                   3167:       \def\indexbackslash{\rawbackslashxx}%
                   3168:       \catcode`\\ = 0
                   3169:       \escapechar = `\\
                   3170:       \begindoublecolumns
                   3171:       \input \jobname.#1s
                   3172:       \enddoublecolumns
                   3173:     \fi
                   3174:   \fi
                   3175:   \closein 1
                   3176: \endgroup}
                   3177:
                   3178: % These macros are used by the sorted index file itself.
                   3179: % Change them to control the appearance of the index.
                   3180:
                   3181: \def\initial#1{{%
                   3182:   % Some minor font changes for the special characters.
1.2     ! noro     3183: \ifjaTeX
        !          3184:   \let\tentt=\sectt \let\tt=\sectt \let\sf=\gt\sectt
        !          3185: \else
1.1       noro     3186:   \let\tentt=\sectt \let\tt=\sectt \let\sf=\sectt
1.2     ! noro     3187: \fi
1.1       noro     3188:   %
                   3189:   % Remove any glue we may have, we'll be inserting our own.
                   3190:   \removelastskip
                   3191:   %
                   3192:   % We like breaks before the index initials, so insert a bonus.
                   3193:   \penalty -300
                   3194:   %
                   3195:   % Typeset the initial.  Making this add up to a whole number of
                   3196:   % baselineskips increases the chance of the dots lining up from column
                   3197:   % to column.  It still won't often be perfect, because of the stretch
                   3198:   % we need before each entry, but it's better.
                   3199:   %
                   3200:   % No shrink because it confuses \balancecolumns.
                   3201:   \vskip 1.67\baselineskip plus .5\baselineskip
                   3202:   \leftline{\secbf #1}%
                   3203:   \vskip .33\baselineskip plus .1\baselineskip
                   3204:   %
                   3205:   % Do our best not to break after the initial.
                   3206:   \nobreak
                   3207: }}
                   3208:
                   3209: % This typesets a paragraph consisting of #1, dot leaders, and then #2
                   3210: % flush to the right margin.  It is used for index and table of contents
                   3211: % entries.  The paragraph is indented by \leftskip.
                   3212: %
                   3213: \def\entry#1#2{\begingroup
                   3214:   %
                   3215:   % Start a new paragraph if necessary, so our assignments below can't
                   3216:   % affect previous text.
                   3217:   \par
                   3218:   %
                   3219:   % Do not fill out the last line with white space.
                   3220:   \parfillskip = 0in
                   3221:   %
                   3222:   % No extra space above this paragraph.
                   3223:   \parskip = 0in
                   3224:   %
                   3225:   % Do not prefer a separate line ending with a hyphen to fewer lines.
                   3226:   \finalhyphendemerits = 0
                   3227:   %
                   3228:   % \hangindent is only relevant when the entry text and page number
                   3229:   % don't both fit on one line.  In that case, bob suggests starting the
                   3230:   % dots pretty far over on the line.  Unfortunately, a large
                   3231:   % indentation looks wrong when the entry text itself is broken across
                   3232:   % lines.  So we use a small indentation and put up with long leaders.
                   3233:   %
                   3234:   % \hangafter is reset to 1 (which is the value we want) at the start
                   3235:   % of each paragraph, so we need not do anything with that.
                   3236:   \hangindent = 2em
                   3237:   %
                   3238:   % When the entry text needs to be broken, just fill out the first line
                   3239:   % with blank space.
                   3240:   \rightskip = 0pt plus1fil
                   3241:   %
                   3242:   % A bit of stretch before each entry for the benefit of balancing columns.
                   3243:   \vskip 0pt plus1pt
                   3244:   %
                   3245:   % Start a ``paragraph'' for the index entry so the line breaking
                   3246:   % parameters we've set above will have an effect.
                   3247:   \noindent
                   3248:   %
                   3249:   % Insert the text of the index entry.  TeX will do line-breaking on it.
                   3250:   #1%
                   3251:   % The following is kludged to not output a line of dots in the index if
                   3252:   % there are no page numbers.  The next person who breaks this will be
                   3253:   % cursed by a Unix daemon.
                   3254:   \def\tempa{{\rm }}%
                   3255:   \def\tempb{#2}%
                   3256:   \edef\tempc{\tempa}%
                   3257:   \edef\tempd{\tempb}%
                   3258:   \ifx\tempc\tempd\ \else%
                   3259:     %
                   3260:     % If we must, put the page number on a line of its own, and fill out
                   3261:     % this line with blank space.  (The \hfil is overwhelmed with the
                   3262:     % fill leaders glue in \indexdotfill if the page number does fit.)
                   3263:     \hfil\penalty50
                   3264:     \null\nobreak\indexdotfill % Have leaders before the page number.
                   3265:     %
                   3266:     % The `\ ' here is removed by the implicit \unskip that TeX does as
                   3267:     % part of (the primitive) \par.  Without it, a spurious underfull
                   3268:     % \hbox ensues.
                   3269:     \ifpdf
                   3270:       \pdfgettoks#2.\ \the\toksA % The page number ends the paragraph.
                   3271:     \else
                   3272:       \ #2% The page number ends the paragraph.
                   3273:     \fi
                   3274:   \fi%
                   3275:   \par
                   3276: \endgroup}
                   3277:
                   3278: % Like \dotfill except takes at least 1 em.
                   3279: \def\indexdotfill{\cleaders
                   3280:   \hbox{$\mathsurround=0pt \mkern1.5mu ${\it .}$ \mkern1.5mu$}\hskip 1em plus 1fill}
                   3281:
                   3282: \def\primary #1{\line{#1\hfil}}
                   3283:
                   3284: \newskip\secondaryindent \secondaryindent=0.5cm
                   3285:
                   3286: \def\secondary #1#2{
                   3287: {\parfillskip=0in \parskip=0in
                   3288: \hangindent =1in \hangafter=1
                   3289: \noindent\hskip\secondaryindent\hbox{#1}\indexdotfill #2\par
                   3290: }}
                   3291:
                   3292: % Define two-column mode, which we use to typeset indexes.
                   3293: % Adapted from the TeXbook, page 416, which is to say,
                   3294: % the manmac.tex format used to print the TeXbook itself.
                   3295: \catcode`\@=11
                   3296:
                   3297: \newbox\partialpage
                   3298: \newdimen\doublecolumnhsize
                   3299:
                   3300: \def\begindoublecolumns{\begingroup % ended by \enddoublecolumns
                   3301:   % Grab any single-column material above us.
                   3302:   \output = {%
                   3303:     %
                   3304:     % Here is a possibility not foreseen in manmac: if we accumulate a
                   3305:     % whole lot of material, we might end up calling this \output
                   3306:     % routine twice in a row (see the doublecol-lose test, which is
                   3307:     % essentially a couple of indexes with @setchapternewpage off).  In
                   3308:     % that case we just ship out what is in \partialpage with the normal
                   3309:     % output routine.  Generally, \partialpage will be empty when this
                   3310:     % runs and this will be a no-op.  See the indexspread.tex test case.
                   3311:     \ifvoid\partialpage \else
                   3312:       \onepageout{\pagecontents\partialpage}%
                   3313:     \fi
                   3314:     %
                   3315:     \global\setbox\partialpage = \vbox{%
                   3316:       % Unvbox the main output page.
                   3317:       \unvbox\PAGE
                   3318:       \kern-\topskip \kern\baselineskip
                   3319:     }%
                   3320:   }%
                   3321:   \eject % run that output routine to set \partialpage
                   3322:   %
                   3323:   % Use the double-column output routine for subsequent pages.
                   3324:   \output = {\doublecolumnout}%
                   3325:   %
                   3326:   % Change the page size parameters.  We could do this once outside this
                   3327:   % routine, in each of @smallbook, @afourpaper, and the default 8.5x11
                   3328:   % format, but then we repeat the same computation.  Repeating a couple
                   3329:   % of assignments once per index is clearly meaningless for the
                   3330:   % execution time, so we may as well do it in one place.
                   3331:   %
                   3332:   % First we halve the line length, less a little for the gutter between
                   3333:   % the columns.  We compute the gutter based on the line length, so it
                   3334:   % changes automatically with the paper format.  The magic constant
                   3335:   % below is chosen so that the gutter has the same value (well, +-<1pt)
                   3336:   % as it did when we hard-coded it.
                   3337:   %
                   3338:   % We put the result in a separate register, \doublecolumhsize, so we
                   3339:   % can restore it in \pagesofar, after \hsize itself has (potentially)
                   3340:   % been clobbered.
                   3341:   %
                   3342:   \doublecolumnhsize = \hsize
                   3343:     \advance\doublecolumnhsize by -.04154\hsize
                   3344:     \divide\doublecolumnhsize by 2
                   3345:   \hsize = \doublecolumnhsize
                   3346:   %
                   3347:   % Double the \vsize as well.  (We don't need a separate register here,
                   3348:   % since nobody clobbers \vsize.)
                   3349:   \advance\vsize by -\ht\partialpage
                   3350:   \vsize = 2\vsize
                   3351: }
                   3352:
                   3353: % The double-column output routine for all double-column pages except
                   3354: % the last.
                   3355: %
                   3356: \def\doublecolumnout{%
                   3357:   \splittopskip=\topskip \splitmaxdepth=\maxdepth
                   3358:   % Get the available space for the double columns -- the normal
                   3359:   % (undoubled) page height minus any material left over from the
                   3360:   % previous page.
                   3361:   \dimen@ = \vsize
                   3362:   \divide\dimen@ by 2
                   3363:   %
                   3364:   % box0 will be the left-hand column, box2 the right.
                   3365:   \setbox0=\vsplit255 to\dimen@ \setbox2=\vsplit255 to\dimen@
                   3366:   \onepageout\pagesofar
                   3367:   \unvbox255
                   3368:   \penalty\outputpenalty
                   3369: }
                   3370: \def\pagesofar{%
                   3371:   % Re-output the contents of the output page -- any previous material,
                   3372:   % followed by the two boxes we just split, in box0 and box2.
                   3373:   \unvbox\partialpage
                   3374:   %
                   3375:   \hsize = \doublecolumnhsize
                   3376:   \wd0=\hsize \wd2=\hsize
                   3377:   \hbox to\pagewidth{\box0\hfil\box2}%
                   3378: }
                   3379: \def\enddoublecolumns{%
                   3380:   \output = {%
                   3381:     % Split the last of the double-column material.  Leave it on the
                   3382:     % current page, no automatic page break.
                   3383:     \balancecolumns
                   3384:     %
                   3385:     % If we end up splitting too much material for the current page,
                   3386:     % though, there will be another page break right after this \output
                   3387:     % invocation ends.  Having called \balancecolumns once, we do not
                   3388:     % want to call it again.  Therefore, reset \output to its normal
                   3389:     % definition right away.  (We hope \balancecolumns will never be
                   3390:     % called on to balance too much material, but if it is, this makes
                   3391:     % the output somewhat more palatable.)
                   3392:     \global\output = {\onepageout{\pagecontents\PAGE}}%
                   3393:   }%
                   3394:   \eject
                   3395:   \endgroup % started in \begindoublecolumns
                   3396:   %
                   3397:   % \pagegoal was set to the doubled \vsize above, since we restarted
                   3398:   % the current page.  We're now back to normal single-column
                   3399:   % typesetting, so reset \pagegoal to the normal \vsize (after the
                   3400:   % \endgroup where \vsize got restored).
                   3401:   \pagegoal = \vsize
                   3402: }
                   3403: \def\balancecolumns{%
                   3404:   % Called at the end of the double column material.
                   3405:   \setbox0 = \vbox{\unvbox255}% like \box255 but more efficient, see p.120.
                   3406:   \dimen@ = \ht0
                   3407:   \advance\dimen@ by \topskip
                   3408:   \advance\dimen@ by-\baselineskip
                   3409:   \divide\dimen@ by 2 % target to split to
                   3410:   %debug\message{final 2-column material height=\the\ht0, target=\the\dimen@.}%
                   3411:   \splittopskip = \topskip
                   3412:   % Loop until we get a decent breakpoint.
                   3413:   {%
                   3414:     \vbadness = 10000
                   3415:     \loop
                   3416:       \global\setbox3 = \copy0
                   3417:       \global\setbox1 = \vsplit3 to \dimen@
                   3418:     \ifdim\ht3>\dimen@
                   3419:       \global\advance\dimen@ by 1pt
                   3420:     \repeat
                   3421:   }%
                   3422:   %debug\message{split to \the\dimen@, column heights: \the\ht1, \the\ht3.}%
                   3423:   \setbox0=\vbox to\dimen@{\unvbox1}%
                   3424:   \setbox2=\vbox to\dimen@{\unvbox3}%
                   3425:   %
                   3426:   \pagesofar
                   3427: }
                   3428: \catcode`\@ = \other
                   3429:
                   3430:
                   3431: \message{sectioning,}
                   3432: % Chapters, sections, etc.
                   3433:
                   3434: \newcount\chapno
                   3435: \newcount\secno        \secno=0
                   3436: \newcount\subsecno     \subsecno=0
                   3437: \newcount\subsubsecno  \subsubsecno=0
                   3438:
                   3439: % This counter is funny since it counts through charcodes of letters A, B, ...
                   3440: \newcount\appendixno  \appendixno = `\@
                   3441: % \def\appendixletter{\char\the\appendixno}
                   3442: % We do the following for the sake of pdftex, which needs the actual
                   3443: % letter in the expansion, not just typeset.
                   3444: \def\appendixletter{%
                   3445:   \ifnum\appendixno=`A A%
                   3446:   \else\ifnum\appendixno=`B B%
                   3447:   \else\ifnum\appendixno=`C C%
                   3448:   \else\ifnum\appendixno=`D D%
                   3449:   \else\ifnum\appendixno=`E E%
                   3450:   \else\ifnum\appendixno=`F F%
                   3451:   \else\ifnum\appendixno=`G G%
                   3452:   \else\ifnum\appendixno=`H H%
                   3453:   \else\ifnum\appendixno=`I I%
                   3454:   \else\ifnum\appendixno=`J J%
                   3455:   \else\ifnum\appendixno=`K K%
                   3456:   \else\ifnum\appendixno=`L L%
                   3457:   \else\ifnum\appendixno=`M M%
                   3458:   \else\ifnum\appendixno=`N N%
                   3459:   \else\ifnum\appendixno=`O O%
                   3460:   \else\ifnum\appendixno=`P P%
                   3461:   \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Q Q%
                   3462:   \else\ifnum\appendixno=`R R%
                   3463:   \else\ifnum\appendixno=`S S%
                   3464:   \else\ifnum\appendixno=`T T%
                   3465:   \else\ifnum\appendixno=`U U%
                   3466:   \else\ifnum\appendixno=`V V%
                   3467:   \else\ifnum\appendixno=`W W%
                   3468:   \else\ifnum\appendixno=`X X%
                   3469:   \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Y Y%
                   3470:   \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Z Z%
                   3471:   % The \the is necessary, despite appearances, because \appendixletter is
                   3472:   % expanded while writing the .toc file.  \char\appendixno is not
                   3473:   % expandable, thus it is written literally, thus all appendixes come out
                   3474:   % with the same letter (or @) in the toc without it.
                   3475:   \else\char\the\appendixno
                   3476:   \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
                   3477:   \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi}
                   3478:
                   3479: % Each @chapter defines this as the name of the chapter.
                   3480: % page headings and footings can use it.  @section does likewise.
                   3481: \def\thischapter{}
                   3482: \def\thissection{}
                   3483:
                   3484: \newcount\absseclevel % used to calculate proper heading level
                   3485: \newcount\secbase\secbase=0 % @raise/lowersections modify this count
                   3486:
                   3487: % @raisesections: treat @section as chapter, @subsection as section, etc.
                   3488: \def\raisesections{\global\advance\secbase by -1}
                   3489: \let\up=\raisesections % original BFox name
                   3490:
                   3491: % @lowersections: treat @chapter as section, @section as subsection, etc.
                   3492: \def\lowersections{\global\advance\secbase by 1}
                   3493: \let\down=\lowersections % original BFox name
                   3494:
                   3495: % Choose a numbered-heading macro
                   3496: % #1 is heading level if unmodified by @raisesections or @lowersections
                   3497: % #2 is text for heading
                   3498: \def\numhead#1#2{\absseclevel=\secbase\advance\absseclevel by #1
                   3499: \ifcase\absseclevel
                   3500:   \chapterzzz{#2}
                   3501: \or
                   3502:   \seczzz{#2}
                   3503: \or
                   3504:   \numberedsubseczzz{#2}
                   3505: \or
                   3506:   \numberedsubsubseczzz{#2}
                   3507: \else
                   3508:   \ifnum \absseclevel<0
                   3509:     \chapterzzz{#2}
                   3510:   \else
                   3511:     \numberedsubsubseczzz{#2}
                   3512:   \fi
                   3513: \fi
                   3514: }
                   3515:
                   3516: % like \numhead, but chooses appendix heading levels
                   3517: \def\apphead#1#2{\absseclevel=\secbase\advance\absseclevel by #1
                   3518: \ifcase\absseclevel
                   3519:   \appendixzzz{#2}
                   3520: \or
                   3521:   \appendixsectionzzz{#2}
                   3522: \or
                   3523:   \appendixsubseczzz{#2}
                   3524: \or
                   3525:   \appendixsubsubseczzz{#2}
                   3526: \else
                   3527:   \ifnum \absseclevel<0
                   3528:     \appendixzzz{#2}
                   3529:   \else
                   3530:     \appendixsubsubseczzz{#2}
                   3531:   \fi
                   3532: \fi
                   3533: }
                   3534:
                   3535: % like \numhead, but chooses numberless heading levels
                   3536: \def\unnmhead#1#2{\absseclevel=\secbase\advance\absseclevel by #1
                   3537: \ifcase\absseclevel
                   3538:   \unnumberedzzz{#2}
                   3539: \or
                   3540:   \unnumberedseczzz{#2}
                   3541: \or
                   3542:   \unnumberedsubseczzz{#2}
                   3543: \or
                   3544:   \unnumberedsubsubseczzz{#2}
                   3545: \else
                   3546:   \ifnum \absseclevel<0
                   3547:     \unnumberedzzz{#2}
                   3548:   \else
                   3549:     \unnumberedsubsubseczzz{#2}
                   3550:   \fi
                   3551: \fi
                   3552: }
                   3553:
                   3554: % @chapter, @appendix, @unnumbered.
                   3555: \def\thischaptername{No Chapter Title}
                   3556: \outer\def\chapter{\parsearg\chapteryyy}
                   3557: \def\chapteryyy #1{\numhead0{#1}} % normally numhead0 calls chapterzzz
                   3558: \def\chapterzzz #1{%
                   3559: \secno=0 \subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0
                   3560: \global\advance \chapno by 1 \message{\putwordChapter\space \the\chapno}%
                   3561: \chapmacro {#1}{\the\chapno}%
                   3562: \gdef\thissection{#1}%
                   3563: \gdef\thischaptername{#1}%
                   3564: % We don't substitute the actual chapter name into \thischapter
                   3565: % because we don't want its macros evaluated now.
                   3566: \xdef\thischapter{\putwordChapter{} \the\chapno: \noexpand\thischaptername}%
                   3567: \toks0 = {#1}%
                   3568: \edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash chapentry{\the\toks0}%
                   3569:                                   {\the\chapno}}}%
                   3570: \temp
                   3571: \donoderef
                   3572: \global\let\section = \numberedsec
                   3573: \global\let\subsection = \numberedsubsec
                   3574: \global\let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec
                   3575: }
                   3576:
                   3577: \outer\def\appendix{\parsearg\appendixyyy}
                   3578: \def\appendixyyy #1{\apphead0{#1}} % normally apphead0 calls appendixzzz
                   3579: \def\appendixzzz #1{%
                   3580: \secno=0 \subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0
                   3581: \global\advance \appendixno by 1
                   3582: \message{\putwordAppendix\space \appendixletter}%
                   3583: \chapmacro {#1}{\putwordAppendix{} \appendixletter}%
                   3584: \gdef\thissection{#1}%
                   3585: \gdef\thischaptername{#1}%
                   3586: \xdef\thischapter{\putwordAppendix{} \appendixletter: \noexpand\thischaptername}%
                   3587: \toks0 = {#1}%
                   3588: \edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash chapentry{\the\toks0}%
                   3589:                        {\putwordAppendix{} \appendixletter}}}%
                   3590: \temp
                   3591: \appendixnoderef
                   3592: \global\let\section = \appendixsec
                   3593: \global\let\subsection = \appendixsubsec
                   3594: \global\let\subsubsection = \appendixsubsubsec
                   3595: }
                   3596:
                   3597: % @centerchap is like @unnumbered, but the heading is centered.
                   3598: \outer\def\centerchap{\parsearg\centerchapyyy}
                   3599: \def\centerchapyyy #1{{\let\unnumbchapmacro=\centerchapmacro \unnumberedyyy{#1}}}
                   3600:
                   3601: % @top is like @unnumbered.
                   3602: \outer\def\top{\parsearg\unnumberedyyy}
                   3603:
                   3604: \outer\def\unnumbered{\parsearg\unnumberedyyy}
                   3605: \def\unnumberedyyy #1{\unnmhead0{#1}} % normally unnmhead0 calls unnumberedzzz
                   3606: \def\unnumberedzzz #1{%
                   3607: \secno=0 \subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0
                   3608: %
                   3609: % This used to be simply \message{#1}, but TeX fully expands the
                   3610: % argument to \message.  Therefore, if #1 contained @-commands, TeX
                   3611: % expanded them.  For example, in `@unnumbered The @cite{Book}', TeX
                   3612: % expanded @cite (which turns out to cause errors because \cite is meant
                   3613: % to be executed, not expanded).
                   3614: %
                   3615: % Anyway, we don't want the fully-expanded definition of @cite to appear
                   3616: % as a result of the \message, we just want `@cite' itself.  We use
                   3617: % \the<toks register> to achieve this: TeX expands \the<toks> only once,
                   3618: % simply yielding the contents of <toks register>.  (We also do this for
                   3619: % the toc entries.)
                   3620: \toks0 = {#1}\message{(\the\toks0)}%
                   3621: %
                   3622: \unnumbchapmacro {#1}%
                   3623: \gdef\thischapter{#1}\gdef\thissection{#1}%
                   3624: \toks0 = {#1}%
                   3625: \edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash unnumbchapentry{\the\toks0}}}%
                   3626: \temp
                   3627: \unnumbnoderef
                   3628: \global\let\section = \unnumberedsec
                   3629: \global\let\subsection = \unnumberedsubsec
                   3630: \global\let\subsubsection = \unnumberedsubsubsec
                   3631: }
                   3632:
                   3633: % Sections.
                   3634: \outer\def\numberedsec{\parsearg\secyyy}
                   3635: \def\secyyy #1{\numhead1{#1}} % normally calls seczzz
                   3636: \def\seczzz #1{%
                   3637: \subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0 \global\advance \secno by 1 %
                   3638: \gdef\thissection{#1}\secheading {#1}{\the\chapno}{\the\secno}%
                   3639: \toks0 = {#1}%
                   3640: \edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash secentry{\the\toks0}%
                   3641:                                   {\the\chapno}{\the\secno}}}%
                   3642: \temp
                   3643: \donoderef
                   3644: \nobreak
                   3645: }
                   3646:
                   3647: \outer\def\appendixsection{\parsearg\appendixsecyyy}
                   3648: \outer\def\appendixsec{\parsearg\appendixsecyyy}
                   3649: \def\appendixsecyyy #1{\apphead1{#1}} % normally calls appendixsectionzzz
                   3650: \def\appendixsectionzzz #1{%
                   3651: \subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0 \global\advance \secno by 1 %
                   3652: \gdef\thissection{#1}\secheading {#1}{\appendixletter}{\the\secno}%
                   3653: \toks0 = {#1}%
                   3654: \edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash secentry{\the\toks0}%
                   3655:                                   {\appendixletter}{\the\secno}}}%
                   3656: \temp
                   3657: \appendixnoderef
                   3658: \nobreak
                   3659: }
                   3660:
                   3661: \outer\def\unnumberedsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsecyyy}
                   3662: \def\unnumberedsecyyy #1{\unnmhead1{#1}} % normally calls unnumberedseczzz
                   3663: \def\unnumberedseczzz #1{%
                   3664: \plainsecheading {#1}\gdef\thissection{#1}%
                   3665: \toks0 = {#1}%
                   3666: \edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash unnumbsecentry{\the\toks0}}}%
                   3667: \temp
                   3668: \unnumbnoderef
                   3669: \nobreak
                   3670: }
                   3671:
                   3672: % Subsections.
                   3673: \outer\def\numberedsubsec{\parsearg\numberedsubsecyyy}
                   3674: \def\numberedsubsecyyy #1{\numhead2{#1}} % normally calls numberedsubseczzz
                   3675: \def\numberedsubseczzz #1{%
                   3676: \gdef\thissection{#1}\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance \subsecno by 1 %
                   3677: \subsecheading {#1}{\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}%
                   3678: \toks0 = {#1}%
                   3679: \edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash subsecentry{\the\toks0}%
                   3680:                                     {\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}}}%
                   3681: \temp
                   3682: \donoderef
                   3683: \nobreak
                   3684: }
                   3685:
                   3686: \outer\def\appendixsubsec{\parsearg\appendixsubsecyyy}
                   3687: \def\appendixsubsecyyy #1{\apphead2{#1}} % normally calls appendixsubseczzz
                   3688: \def\appendixsubseczzz #1{%
                   3689: \gdef\thissection{#1}\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance \subsecno by 1 %
                   3690: \subsecheading {#1}{\appendixletter}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}%
                   3691: \toks0 = {#1}%
                   3692: \edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash subsecentry{\the\toks0}%
                   3693:                                 {\appendixletter}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}}}%
                   3694: \temp
                   3695: \appendixnoderef
                   3696: \nobreak
                   3697: }
                   3698:
                   3699: \outer\def\unnumberedsubsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsubsecyyy}
                   3700: \def\unnumberedsubsecyyy #1{\unnmhead2{#1}} %normally calls unnumberedsubseczzz
                   3701: \def\unnumberedsubseczzz #1{%
                   3702: \plainsubsecheading {#1}\gdef\thissection{#1}%
                   3703: \toks0 = {#1}%
                   3704: \edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash unnumbsubsecentry%
                   3705:                                     {\the\toks0}}}%
                   3706: \temp
                   3707: \unnumbnoderef
                   3708: \nobreak
                   3709: }
                   3710:
                   3711: % Subsubsections.
                   3712: \outer\def\numberedsubsubsec{\parsearg\numberedsubsubsecyyy}
                   3713: \def\numberedsubsubsecyyy #1{\numhead3{#1}} % normally numberedsubsubseczzz
                   3714: \def\numberedsubsubseczzz #1{%
                   3715: \gdef\thissection{#1}\global\advance \subsubsecno by 1 %
                   3716: \subsubsecheading {#1}
                   3717:   {\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}{\the\subsubsecno}%
                   3718: \toks0 = {#1}%
                   3719: \edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash subsubsecentry{\the\toks0}%
                   3720:   {\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}{\the\subsubsecno}}}%
                   3721: \temp
                   3722: \donoderef
                   3723: \nobreak
                   3724: }
                   3725:
                   3726: \outer\def\appendixsubsubsec{\parsearg\appendixsubsubsecyyy}
                   3727: \def\appendixsubsubsecyyy #1{\apphead3{#1}} % normally appendixsubsubseczzz
                   3728: \def\appendixsubsubseczzz #1{%
                   3729: \gdef\thissection{#1}\global\advance \subsubsecno by 1 %
                   3730: \subsubsecheading {#1}
                   3731:   {\appendixletter}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}{\the\subsubsecno}%
                   3732: \toks0 = {#1}%
                   3733: \edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash subsubsecentry{\the\toks0}%
                   3734:   {\appendixletter}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}{\the\subsubsecno}}}%
                   3735: \temp
                   3736: \appendixnoderef
                   3737: \nobreak
                   3738: }
                   3739:
                   3740: \outer\def\unnumberedsubsubsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsubsubsecyyy}
                   3741: \def\unnumberedsubsubsecyyy #1{\unnmhead3{#1}} %normally unnumberedsubsubseczzz
                   3742: \def\unnumberedsubsubseczzz #1{%
                   3743: \plainsubsubsecheading {#1}\gdef\thissection{#1}%
                   3744: \toks0 = {#1}%
                   3745: \edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash unnumbsubsubsecentry%
                   3746:                                     {\the\toks0}}}%
                   3747: \temp
                   3748: \unnumbnoderef
                   3749: \nobreak
                   3750: }
                   3751:
                   3752: % These are variants which are not "outer", so they can appear in @ifinfo.
                   3753: % Actually, they should now be obsolete; ordinary section commands should work.
                   3754: \def\infotop{\parsearg\unnumberedzzz}
                   3755: \def\infounnumbered{\parsearg\unnumberedzzz}
                   3756: \def\infounnumberedsec{\parsearg\unnumberedseczzz}
                   3757: \def\infounnumberedsubsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsubseczzz}
                   3758: \def\infounnumberedsubsubsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsubsubseczzz}
                   3759:
                   3760: \def\infoappendix{\parsearg\appendixzzz}
                   3761: \def\infoappendixsec{\parsearg\appendixseczzz}
                   3762: \def\infoappendixsubsec{\parsearg\appendixsubseczzz}
                   3763: \def\infoappendixsubsubsec{\parsearg\appendixsubsubseczzz}
                   3764:
                   3765: \def\infochapter{\parsearg\chapterzzz}
                   3766: \def\infosection{\parsearg\sectionzzz}
                   3767: \def\infosubsection{\parsearg\subsectionzzz}
                   3768: \def\infosubsubsection{\parsearg\subsubsectionzzz}
                   3769:
                   3770: % These macros control what the section commands do, according
                   3771: % to what kind of chapter we are in (ordinary, appendix, or unnumbered).
                   3772: % Define them by default for a numbered chapter.
                   3773: \global\let\section = \numberedsec
                   3774: \global\let\subsection = \numberedsubsec
                   3775: \global\let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec
                   3776:
                   3777: % Define @majorheading, @heading and @subheading
                   3778:
                   3779: % NOTE on use of \vbox for chapter headings, section headings, and such:
                   3780: %       1) We use \vbox rather than the earlier \line to permit
                   3781: %          overlong headings to fold.
                   3782: %       2) \hyphenpenalty is set to 10000 because hyphenation in a
                   3783: %          heading is obnoxious; this forbids it.
                   3784: %       3) Likewise, headings look best if no \parindent is used, and
                   3785: %          if justification is not attempted.  Hence \raggedright.
                   3786:
                   3787:
                   3788: \def\majorheading{\parsearg\majorheadingzzz}
                   3789: \def\majorheadingzzz #1{%
                   3790: {\advance\chapheadingskip by 10pt \chapbreak }%
                   3791: {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000
                   3792:                   \parindent=0pt\raggedright
                   3793:                   \rm #1\hfill}}\bigskip \par\penalty 200}
                   3794:
                   3795: \def\chapheading{\parsearg\chapheadingzzz}
                   3796: \def\chapheadingzzz #1{\chapbreak %
                   3797: {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000
                   3798:                   \parindent=0pt\raggedright
                   3799:                   \rm #1\hfill}}\bigskip \par\penalty 200}
                   3800:
                   3801: % @heading, @subheading, @subsubheading.
                   3802: \def\heading{\parsearg\plainsecheading}
                   3803: \def\subheading{\parsearg\plainsubsecheading}
                   3804: \def\subsubheading{\parsearg\plainsubsubsecheading}
                   3805:
                   3806: % These macros generate a chapter, section, etc. heading only
                   3807: % (including whitespace, linebreaking, etc. around it),
                   3808: % given all the information in convenient, parsed form.
                   3809:
                   3810: %%% Args are the skip and penalty (usually negative)
                   3811: \def\dobreak#1#2{\par\ifdim\lastskip<#1\removelastskip\penalty#2\vskip#1\fi}
                   3812:
                   3813: \def\setchapterstyle #1 {\csname CHAPF#1\endcsname}
                   3814:
                   3815: %%% Define plain chapter starts, and page on/off switching for it
                   3816: % Parameter controlling skip before chapter headings (if needed)
                   3817:
                   3818: \newskip\chapheadingskip
                   3819:
                   3820: \def\chapbreak{\dobreak \chapheadingskip {-4000}}
                   3821: \def\chappager{\par\vfill\supereject}
                   3822: \def\chapoddpage{\chappager \ifodd\pageno \else \hbox to 0pt{} \chappager\fi}
                   3823:
                   3824: \def\setchapternewpage #1 {\csname CHAPPAG#1\endcsname}
                   3825:
                   3826: \def\CHAPPAGoff{%
                   3827: \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
                   3828: \global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapbreak
                   3829: \global\let\pagealignmacro=\chappager}
                   3830:
                   3831: \def\CHAPPAGon{%
                   3832: \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
                   3833: \global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chappager
                   3834: \global\let\pagealignmacro=\chappager
                   3835: \global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSsingle}}
                   3836:
                   3837: \def\CHAPPAGodd{
                   3838: \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage
                   3839: \global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapoddpage
                   3840: \global\let\pagealignmacro=\chapoddpage
                   3841: \global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble}}
                   3842:
                   3843: \CHAPPAGon
                   3844:
                   3845: \def\CHAPFplain{
                   3846: \global\let\chapmacro=\chfplain
                   3847: \global\let\unnumbchapmacro=\unnchfplain
                   3848: \global\let\centerchapmacro=\centerchfplain}
                   3849:
                   3850: % Plain chapter opening.
                   3851: % #1 is the text, #2 the chapter number or empty if unnumbered.
                   3852: \def\chfplain#1#2{%
                   3853:   \pchapsepmacro
                   3854:   {%
                   3855:     \chapfonts \rm
                   3856:     \def\chapnum{#2}%
                   3857:     \setbox0 = \hbox{#2\ifx\chapnum\empty\else\enspace\fi}%
                   3858:     \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt \raggedright
                   3859:           \hangindent = \wd0 \centerparametersmaybe
                   3860:           \unhbox0 #1\par}%
                   3861:   }%
                   3862:   \nobreak\bigskip % no page break after a chapter title
                   3863:   \nobreak
                   3864: }
                   3865:
                   3866: % Plain opening for unnumbered.
                   3867: \def\unnchfplain#1{\chfplain{#1}{}}
                   3868:
                   3869: % @centerchap -- centered and unnumbered.
                   3870: \let\centerparametersmaybe = \relax
                   3871: \def\centerchfplain#1{{%
                   3872:   \def\centerparametersmaybe{%
                   3873:     \advance\rightskip by 3\rightskip
                   3874:     \leftskip = \rightskip
                   3875:     \parfillskip = 0pt
                   3876:   }%
                   3877:   \chfplain{#1}{}%
                   3878: }}
                   3879:
                   3880: \CHAPFplain % The default
                   3881:
                   3882: \def\unnchfopen #1{%
                   3883: \chapoddpage {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000
                   3884:                        \parindent=0pt\raggedright
                   3885:                        \rm #1\hfill}}\bigskip \par\nobreak
                   3886: }
                   3887:
                   3888: \def\chfopen #1#2{\chapoddpage {\chapfonts
                   3889: \vbox to 3in{\vfil \hbox to\hsize{\hfil #2} \hbox to\hsize{\hfil #1} \vfil}}%
                   3890: \par\penalty 5000 %
                   3891: }
                   3892:
                   3893: \def\centerchfopen #1{%
                   3894: \chapoddpage {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000
                   3895:                        \parindent=0pt
                   3896:                        \hfill {\rm #1}\hfill}}\bigskip \par\nobreak
                   3897: }
                   3898:
                   3899: \def\CHAPFopen{
                   3900: \global\let\chapmacro=\chfopen
                   3901: \global\let\unnumbchapmacro=\unnchfopen
                   3902: \global\let\centerchapmacro=\centerchfopen}
                   3903:
                   3904:
                   3905: % Section titles.
                   3906: \newskip\secheadingskip
                   3907: \def\secheadingbreak{\dobreak \secheadingskip {-1000}}
                   3908: \def\secheading#1#2#3{\sectionheading{sec}{#2.#3}{#1}}
                   3909: \def\plainsecheading#1{\sectionheading{sec}{}{#1}}
                   3910:
                   3911: % Subsection titles.
                   3912: \newskip \subsecheadingskip
                   3913: \def\subsecheadingbreak{\dobreak \subsecheadingskip {-500}}
                   3914: \def\subsecheading#1#2#3#4{\sectionheading{subsec}{#2.#3.#4}{#1}}
                   3915: \def\plainsubsecheading#1{\sectionheading{subsec}{}{#1}}
                   3916:
                   3917: % Subsubsection titles.
                   3918: \let\subsubsecheadingskip = \subsecheadingskip
                   3919: \let\subsubsecheadingbreak = \subsecheadingbreak
                   3920: \def\subsubsecheading#1#2#3#4#5{\sectionheading{subsubsec}{#2.#3.#4.#5}{#1}}
                   3921: \def\plainsubsubsecheading#1{\sectionheading{subsubsec}{}{#1}}
                   3922:
                   3923:
                   3924: % Print any size section title.
                   3925: %
                   3926: % #1 is the section type (sec/subsec/subsubsec), #2 is the section
                   3927: % number (maybe empty), #3 the text.
                   3928: \def\sectionheading#1#2#3{%
                   3929:   {%
                   3930:     \expandafter\advance\csname #1headingskip\endcsname by \parskip
                   3931:     \csname #1headingbreak\endcsname
                   3932:   }%
                   3933:   {%
                   3934:     % Switch to the right set of fonts.
                   3935:     \csname #1fonts\endcsname \rm
                   3936:     %
                   3937:     % Only insert the separating space if we have a section number.
                   3938:     \def\secnum{#2}%
                   3939:     \setbox0 = \hbox{#2\ifx\secnum\empty\else\enspace\fi}%
                   3940:     %
                   3941:     \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt \raggedright
                   3942:           \hangindent = \wd0 % zero if no section number
                   3943:           \unhbox0 #3}%
                   3944:   }%
                   3945:   \ifdim\parskip<10pt \nobreak\kern10pt\nobreak\kern-\parskip\fi \nobreak
                   3946: }
                   3947:
                   3948:
                   3949: \message{toc,}
                   3950: % Table of contents.
                   3951: \newwrite\tocfile
                   3952:
                   3953: % Write an entry to the toc file, opening it if necessary.
                   3954: % Called from @chapter, etc.  We supply {\folio} at the end of the
                   3955: % argument, which will end up as the last argument to the \...entry macro.
                   3956: %
                   3957: % We open the .toc file here instead of at @setfilename or any other
                   3958: % given time so that @contents can be put in the document anywhere.
                   3959: %
                   3960: \newif\iftocfileopened
                   3961: \def\writetocentry#1{%
                   3962:   \iftocfileopened\else
                   3963:     \immediate\openout\tocfile = \jobname.toc
                   3964:     \global\tocfileopenedtrue
                   3965:   \fi
                   3966:   \iflinks \write\tocfile{#1{\folio}}\fi
                   3967: }
                   3968:
                   3969: \newskip\contentsrightmargin \contentsrightmargin=1in
                   3970: \newcount\savepageno
                   3971: \newcount\lastnegativepageno \lastnegativepageno = -1
                   3972:
                   3973: % Finish up the main text and prepare to read what we've written
                   3974: % to \tocfile.
                   3975: %
                   3976: \def\startcontents#1{%
                   3977:    % If @setchapternewpage on, and @headings double, the contents should
                   3978:    % start on an odd page, unlike chapters.  Thus, we maintain
                   3979:    % \contentsalignmacro in parallel with \pagealignmacro.
                   3980:    % From: Torbjorn Granlund <tege@matematik.su.se>
                   3981:    \contentsalignmacro
                   3982:    \immediate\closeout\tocfile
                   3983:    %
                   3984:    % Don't need to put `Contents' or `Short Contents' in the headline.
                   3985:    % It is abundantly clear what they are.
                   3986:    \unnumbchapmacro{#1}\def\thischapter{}%
                   3987:    \savepageno = \pageno
                   3988:    \begingroup                  % Set up to handle contents files properly.
                   3989:       \catcode`\\=0  \catcode`\{=1  \catcode`\}=2  \catcode`\@=11
                   3990:       % We can't do this, because then an actual ^ in a section
                   3991:       % title fails, e.g., @chapter ^ -- exponentiation.  --karl, 9jul97.
                   3992:       %\catcode`\^=7 % to see ^^e4 as \"a etc. juha@piuha.ydi.vtt.fi
                   3993:       \raggedbottom             % Worry more about breakpoints than the bottom.
                   3994:       \advance\hsize by -\contentsrightmargin % Don't use the full line length.
                   3995:       %
                   3996:       % Roman numerals for page numbers.
                   3997:       \ifnum \pageno>0 \pageno = \lastnegativepageno \fi
                   3998: }
                   3999:
                   4000:
                   4001: % Normal (long) toc.
                   4002: \def\contents{%
                   4003:    \startcontents{\putwordTOC}%
                   4004:      \openin 1 \jobname.toc
                   4005:      \ifeof 1 \else
                   4006:        \closein 1
                   4007:        \input \jobname.toc
                   4008:      \fi
                   4009:      \vfill \eject
                   4010:      \contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect
                   4011:      \pdfmakeoutlines
                   4012:    \endgroup
                   4013:    \lastnegativepageno = \pageno
                   4014:    \pageno = \savepageno
                   4015: }
                   4016:
                   4017: % And just the chapters.
                   4018: \def\summarycontents{%
                   4019:    \startcontents{\putwordShortTOC}%
                   4020:       %
                   4021:       \let\chapentry = \shortchapentry
                   4022:       \let\unnumbchapentry = \shortunnumberedentry
                   4023:       % We want a true roman here for the page numbers.
                   4024:       \secfonts
                   4025:       \let\rm=\shortcontrm \let\bf=\shortcontbf \let\sl=\shortcontsl
1.2     ! noro     4026: \ifjaTeX
        !          4027:       \let\mc=\shortcontmc \let\gt=\shortcontgt
        !          4028:       \mc\rm
        !          4029: \else
1.1       noro     4030:       \rm
1.2     ! noro     4031: \fi
1.1       noro     4032:       \hyphenpenalty = 10000
                   4033:       \advance\baselineskip by 1pt % Open it up a little.
                   4034:       \def\secentry ##1##2##3##4{}
                   4035:       \def\unnumbsecentry ##1##2{}
                   4036:       \def\subsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5{}
                   4037:       \def\unnumbsubsecentry ##1##2{}
                   4038:       \def\subsubsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5##6{}
                   4039:       \def\unnumbsubsubsecentry ##1##2{}
                   4040:       \openin 1 \jobname.toc
                   4041:       \ifeof 1 \else
                   4042:         \closein 1
                   4043:         \input \jobname.toc
                   4044:       \fi
                   4045:      \vfill \eject
                   4046:      \contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect
                   4047:    \endgroup
                   4048:    \lastnegativepageno = \pageno
                   4049:    \pageno = \savepageno
                   4050: }
                   4051: \let\shortcontents = \summarycontents
                   4052:
                   4053: \ifpdf
                   4054:   \pdfcatalog{/PageMode /UseOutlines}%
                   4055: \fi
                   4056:
                   4057: % These macros generate individual entries in the table of contents.
                   4058: % The first argument is the chapter or section name.
                   4059: % The last argument is the page number.
                   4060: % The arguments in between are the chapter number, section number, ...
                   4061:
                   4062: % Chapter-level things, for both the long and short contents.
                   4063: \def\chapentry#1#2#3{\dochapentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#3}}
                   4064:
                   4065: % See comments in \dochapentry re vbox and related settings
                   4066: \def\shortchapentry#1#2#3{%
                   4067:   \tocentry{\shortchaplabel{#2}\labelspace #1}{\doshortpageno\bgroup#3\egroup}%
                   4068: }
                   4069:
                   4070: % Typeset the label for a chapter or appendix for the short contents.
                   4071: % The arg is, e.g. `Appendix A' for an appendix, or `3' for a chapter.
                   4072: % We could simplify the code here by writing out an \appendixentry
                   4073: % command in the toc file for appendices, instead of using \chapentry
                   4074: % for both, but it doesn't seem worth it.
                   4075: %
                   4076: \newdimen\shortappendixwidth
                   4077: %
                   4078: \def\shortchaplabel#1{%
                   4079:   % Compute width of word "Appendix", may change with language.
1.2     ! noro     4080:   \ifjaTeX
        !          4081:   \setbox0 = \hbox{\shortcontmc\shortcontrm \putwordAppendix }
        !          4082:   \else
        !          4083:   \setbox0 = \hbox{\shortcontrm \putwordAppendix }
        !          4084:   \fi
1.1       noro     4085:   \shortappendixwidth = \wd0
                   4086:   %
                   4087:   % We typeset #1 in a box of constant width, regardless of the text of
                   4088:   % #1, so the chapter titles will come out aligned.
                   4089:   \setbox0 = \hbox{#1}%
                   4090:   \dimen0 = \ifdim\wd0 > \shortappendixwidth \shortappendixwidth \else 0pt \fi
                   4091:   %
                   4092:   % This space should be plenty, since a single number is .5em, and the
                   4093:   % widest letter (M) is 1em, at least in the Computer Modern fonts.
                   4094:   % (This space doesn't include the extra space that gets added after
                   4095:   % the label; that gets put in by \shortchapentry above.)
                   4096:   \advance\dimen0 by 1.1em
                   4097:   \hbox to \dimen0{#1\hfil}%
                   4098: }
                   4099:
                   4100: \def\unnumbchapentry#1#2{\dochapentry{#1}{#2}}
                   4101: \def\shortunnumberedentry#1#2{\tocentry{#1}{\doshortpageno\bgroup#2\egroup}}
                   4102:
                   4103: % Sections.
                   4104: \def\secentry#1#2#3#4{\dosecentry{#2.#3\labelspace#1}{#4}}
                   4105: \def\unnumbsecentry#1#2{\dosecentry{#1}{#2}}
                   4106:
                   4107: % Subsections.
                   4108: \def\subsecentry#1#2#3#4#5{\dosubsecentry{#2.#3.#4\labelspace#1}{#5}}
                   4109: \def\unnumbsubsecentry#1#2{\dosubsecentry{#1}{#2}}
                   4110:
                   4111: % And subsubsections.
                   4112: \def\subsubsecentry#1#2#3#4#5#6{%
                   4113:   \dosubsubsecentry{#2.#3.#4.#5\labelspace#1}{#6}}
                   4114: \def\unnumbsubsubsecentry#1#2{\dosubsubsecentry{#1}{#2}}
                   4115:
                   4116: % This parameter controls the indentation of the various levels.
                   4117: \newdimen\tocindent \tocindent = 3pc
                   4118:
                   4119: % Now for the actual typesetting. In all these, #1 is the text and #2 is the
                   4120: % page number.
                   4121: %
                   4122: % If the toc has to be broken over pages, we want it to be at chapters
                   4123: % if at all possible; hence the \penalty.
                   4124: \def\dochapentry#1#2{%
                   4125:    \penalty-300 \vskip1\baselineskip plus.33\baselineskip minus.25\baselineskip
                   4126:    \begingroup
                   4127:      \chapentryfonts
                   4128:      \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
                   4129:    \endgroup
                   4130:    \nobreak\vskip .25\baselineskip plus.1\baselineskip
                   4131: }
                   4132:
                   4133: \def\dosecentry#1#2{\begingroup
                   4134:   \secentryfonts \leftskip=\tocindent
                   4135:   \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
                   4136: \endgroup}
                   4137:
                   4138: \def\dosubsecentry#1#2{\begingroup
                   4139:   \subsecentryfonts \leftskip=2\tocindent
                   4140:   \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
                   4141: \endgroup}
                   4142:
                   4143: \def\dosubsubsecentry#1#2{\begingroup
                   4144:   \subsubsecentryfonts \leftskip=3\tocindent
                   4145:   \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
                   4146: \endgroup}
                   4147:
                   4148: % Final typesetting of a toc entry; we use the same \entry macro as for
                   4149: % the index entries, but we want to suppress hyphenation here.  (We
                   4150: % can't do that in the \entry macro, since index entries might consist
                   4151: % of hyphenated-identifiers-that-do-not-fit-on-a-line-and-nothing-else.)
                   4152: \def\tocentry#1#2{\begingroup
                   4153:   \vskip 0pt plus1pt % allow a little stretch for the sake of nice page breaks
                   4154:   % Do not use \turnoffactive in these arguments.  Since the toc is
                   4155:   % typeset in cmr, so characters such as _ would come out wrong; we
                   4156:   % have to do the usual translation tricks.
                   4157:   \entry{#1}{#2}%
                   4158: \endgroup}
                   4159:
                   4160: % Space between chapter (or whatever) number and the title.
                   4161: \def\labelspace{\hskip1em \relax}
                   4162:
                   4163: \def\dopageno#1{{\rm #1}}
                   4164: \def\doshortpageno#1{{\rm #1}}
                   4165:
                   4166: \def\chapentryfonts{\secfonts \rm}
                   4167: \def\secentryfonts{\textfonts}
                   4168: \let\subsecentryfonts = \textfonts
                   4169: \let\subsubsecentryfonts = \textfonts
                   4170:
                   4171:
                   4172: \message{environments,}
                   4173: % @foo ... @end foo.
                   4174:
                   4175: % Since these characters are used in examples, it should be an even number of
                   4176: % \tt widths. Each \tt character is 1en, so two makes it 1em.
                   4177: % Furthermore, these definitions must come after we define our fonts.
                   4178: \newbox\dblarrowbox    \newbox\longdblarrowbox
                   4179: \newbox\pushcharbox    \newbox\bullbox
                   4180: \newbox\equivbox       \newbox\errorbox
                   4181:
                   4182: %{\tentt
                   4183: %\global\setbox\dblarrowbox = \hbox to 1em{\hfil$\Rightarrow$\hfil}
                   4184: %\global\setbox\longdblarrowbox = \hbox to 1em{\hfil$\mapsto$\hfil}
                   4185: %\global\setbox\pushcharbox = \hbox to 1em{\hfil$\dashv$\hfil}
                   4186: %\global\setbox\equivbox = \hbox to 1em{\hfil$\ptexequiv$\hfil}
                   4187: % Adapted from the manmac format (p.420 of TeXbook)
                   4188: %\global\setbox\bullbox = \hbox to 1em{\kern.15em\vrule height .75ex width .85ex
                   4189: %                                      depth .1ex\hfil}
                   4190: %}
                   4191:
                   4192: % @point{}, @result{}, @expansion{}, @print{}, @equiv{}.
                   4193: \def\point{$\star$}
                   4194: \def\result{\leavevmode\raise.15ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\Rightarrow$\hfil}}
                   4195: \def\expansion{\leavevmode\raise.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\mapsto$\hfil}}
                   4196: \def\print{\leavevmode\lower.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\dashv$\hfil}}
                   4197: \def\equiv{\leavevmode\lower.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\ptexequiv$\hfil}}
                   4198:
                   4199: % Adapted from the TeXbook's \boxit.
                   4200: {\tentt \global\dimen0 = 3em}% Width of the box.
                   4201: \dimen2 = .55pt % Thickness of rules
                   4202: % The text. (`r' is open on the right, `e' somewhat less so on the left.)
                   4203: \setbox0 = \hbox{\kern-.75pt \tensf error\kern-1.5pt}
                   4204:
                   4205: \global\setbox\errorbox=\hbox to \dimen0{\hfil
                   4206:    \hsize = \dimen0 \advance\hsize by -5.8pt % Space to left+right.
                   4207:    \advance\hsize by -2\dimen2 % Rules.
                   4208:    \vbox{
                   4209:       \hrule height\dimen2
                   4210:       \hbox{\vrule width\dimen2 \kern3pt          % Space to left of text.
                   4211:          \vtop{\kern2.4pt \box0 \kern2.4pt}% Space above/below.
                   4212:          \kern3pt\vrule width\dimen2}% Space to right.
                   4213:       \hrule height\dimen2}
                   4214:     \hfil}
                   4215:
                   4216: % The @error{} command.
                   4217: \def\error{\leavevmode\lower.7ex\copy\errorbox}
                   4218:
                   4219: % @tex ... @end tex    escapes into raw Tex temporarily.
                   4220: % One exception: @ is still an escape character, so that @end tex works.
                   4221: % But \@ or @@ will get a plain tex @ character.
                   4222:
                   4223: \def\tex{\begingroup
                   4224:   \catcode `\\=0 \catcode `\{=1 \catcode `\}=2
                   4225:   \catcode `\$=3 \catcode `\&=4 \catcode `\#=6
                   4226:   \catcode `\^=7 \catcode `\_=8 \catcode `\~=13 \let~=\tie
                   4227:   \catcode `\%=14
                   4228:   \catcode 43=12 % plus
                   4229:   \catcode`\"=12
                   4230:   \catcode`\==12
                   4231:   \catcode`\|=12
                   4232:   \catcode`\<=12
                   4233:   \catcode`\>=12
                   4234:   \escapechar=`\\
                   4235:   %
                   4236:   \let\b=\ptexb
                   4237:   \let\bullet=\ptexbullet
                   4238:   \let\c=\ptexc
                   4239:   \let\,=\ptexcomma
                   4240:   \let\.=\ptexdot
                   4241:   \let\dots=\ptexdots
                   4242:   \let\equiv=\ptexequiv
                   4243:   \let\!=\ptexexclam
                   4244:   \let\i=\ptexi
                   4245:   \let\{=\ptexlbrace
                   4246:   \let\+=\tabalign
                   4247:   \let\}=\ptexrbrace
                   4248:   \let\*=\ptexstar
                   4249:   \let\t=\ptext
                   4250:   %
                   4251:   \def\endldots{\mathinner{\ldots\ldots\ldots\ldots}}%
                   4252:   \def\enddots{\relax\ifmmode\endldots\else$\mathsurround=0pt \endldots\,$\fi}%
                   4253:   \def\@{@}%
                   4254: \let\Etex=\endgroup}
                   4255:
                   4256: % Define @lisp ... @endlisp.
                   4257: % @lisp does a \begingroup so it can rebind things,
                   4258: % including the definition of @endlisp (which normally is erroneous).
                   4259:
                   4260: % Amount to narrow the margins by for @lisp.
                   4261: \newskip\lispnarrowing \lispnarrowing=0.4in
                   4262:
                   4263: % This is the definition that ^^M gets inside @lisp, @example, and other
                   4264: % such environments.  \null is better than a space, since it doesn't
                   4265: % have any width.
                   4266: \def\lisppar{\null\endgraf}
                   4267:
                   4268: % Make each space character in the input produce a normal interword
                   4269: % space in the output.  Don't allow a line break at this space, as this
                   4270: % is used only in environments like @example, where each line of input
                   4271: % should produce a line of output anyway.
                   4272: %
                   4273: {\obeyspaces %
                   4274: \gdef\sepspaces{\obeyspaces\let =\tie}}
                   4275:
                   4276: % Define \obeyedspace to be our active space, whatever it is.  This is
                   4277: % for use in \parsearg.
                   4278: {\sepspaces%
                   4279: \global\let\obeyedspace= }
                   4280:
                   4281: % This space is always present above and below environments.
                   4282: \newskip\envskipamount \envskipamount = 0pt
                   4283:
                   4284: % Make spacing and below environment symmetrical.  We use \parskip here
                   4285: % to help in doing that, since in @example-like environments \parskip
                   4286: % is reset to zero; thus the \afterenvbreak inserts no space -- but the
                   4287: % start of the next paragraph will insert \parskip
                   4288: %
                   4289: \def\aboveenvbreak{{\advance\envskipamount by \parskip
                   4290: \endgraf \ifdim\lastskip<\envskipamount
                   4291: \removelastskip \penalty-50 \vskip\envskipamount \fi}}
                   4292:
                   4293: \let\afterenvbreak = \aboveenvbreak
                   4294:
                   4295: % \nonarrowing is a flag.  If "set", @lisp etc don't narrow margins.
                   4296: \let\nonarrowing=\relax
                   4297:
                   4298: % @cartouche ... @end cartouche: draw rectangle w/rounded corners around
                   4299: % environment contents.
                   4300: \font\circle=lcircle10
                   4301: \newdimen\circthick
                   4302: \newdimen\cartouter\newdimen\cartinner
                   4303: \newskip\normbskip\newskip\normpskip\newskip\normlskip
                   4304: \circthick=\fontdimen8\circle
                   4305: %
                   4306: \def\ctl{{\circle\char'013\hskip -6pt}}% 6pt from pl file: 1/2charwidth
                   4307: \def\ctr{{\hskip 6pt\circle\char'010}}
                   4308: \def\cbl{{\circle\char'012\hskip -6pt}}
                   4309: \def\cbr{{\hskip 6pt\circle\char'011}}
                   4310: \def\carttop{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip
                   4311:         \ctl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\ctr
                   4312:         \hskip\rskip}}
                   4313: \def\cartbot{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip
                   4314:         \cbl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\cbr
                   4315:         \hskip\rskip}}
                   4316: %
                   4317: \newskip\lskip\newskip\rskip
                   4318:
                   4319: \long\def\cartouche{%
                   4320: \begingroup
                   4321:         \lskip=\leftskip \rskip=\rightskip
                   4322:         \leftskip=0pt\rightskip=0pt %we want these *outside*.
                   4323:         \cartinner=\hsize \advance\cartinner by-\lskip
                   4324:                           \advance\cartinner by-\rskip
                   4325:         \cartouter=\hsize
                   4326:         \advance\cartouter by 18.4pt % allow for 3pt kerns on either
                   4327: %                                    side, and for 6pt waste from
                   4328: %                                    each corner char, and rule thickness
                   4329:         \normbskip=\baselineskip \normpskip=\parskip \normlskip=\lineskip
                   4330:         % Flag to tell @lisp, etc., not to narrow margin.
                   4331:         \let\nonarrowing=\comment
                   4332:         \vbox\bgroup
                   4333:                 \baselineskip=0pt\parskip=0pt\lineskip=0pt
                   4334:                 \carttop
                   4335:                 \hbox\bgroup
                   4336:                         \hskip\lskip
                   4337:                         \vrule\kern3pt
                   4338:                         \vbox\bgroup
                   4339:                                 \hsize=\cartinner
                   4340:                                 \kern3pt
                   4341:                                 \begingroup
                   4342:                                         \baselineskip=\normbskip
                   4343:                                         \lineskip=\normlskip
                   4344:                                         \parskip=\normpskip
                   4345:                                         \vskip -\parskip
                   4346: \def\Ecartouche{%
                   4347:                                 \endgroup
                   4348:                                 \kern3pt
                   4349:                         \egroup
                   4350:                         \kern3pt\vrule
                   4351:                         \hskip\rskip
                   4352:                 \egroup
                   4353:                 \cartbot
                   4354:         \egroup
                   4355: \endgroup
                   4356: }}
                   4357:
                   4358:
                   4359: % This macro is called at the beginning of all the @example variants,
                   4360: % inside a group.
                   4361: \def\nonfillstart{%
                   4362:   \aboveenvbreak
                   4363:   \inENV % This group ends at the end of the body
                   4364:   \hfuzz = 12pt % Don't be fussy
                   4365:   \sepspaces % Make spaces be word-separators rather than space tokens.
                   4366:   \singlespace
                   4367:   \let\par = \lisppar % don't ignore blank lines
                   4368:   \obeylines % each line of input is a line of output
                   4369:   \parskip = 0pt
                   4370:   \parindent = 0pt
                   4371:   \emergencystretch = 0pt % don't try to avoid overfull boxes
                   4372:   % @cartouche defines \nonarrowing to inhibit narrowing
                   4373:   % at next level down.
                   4374:   \ifx\nonarrowing\relax
                   4375:     \advance \leftskip by \lispnarrowing
                   4376:     \exdentamount=\lispnarrowing
                   4377:     \let\exdent=\nofillexdent
                   4378:     \let\nonarrowing=\relax
                   4379:   \fi
                   4380: }
                   4381:
                   4382: % Define the \E... control sequence only if we are inside the particular
                   4383: % environment, so the error checking in \end will work.
                   4384: %
                   4385: % To end an @example-like environment, we first end the paragraph (via
                   4386: % \afterenvbreak's vertical glue), and then the group.  That way we keep
                   4387: % the zero \parskip that the environments set -- \parskip glue will be
                   4388: % inserted at the beginning of the next paragraph in the document, after
                   4389: % the environment.
                   4390: %
                   4391: \def\nonfillfinish{\afterenvbreak\endgroup}
                   4392:
                   4393: % @lisp: indented, narrowed, typewriter font.
                   4394: \def\lisp{\begingroup
                   4395:   \nonfillstart
                   4396:   \let\Elisp = \nonfillfinish
                   4397:   \tt
                   4398:   \let\kbdfont = \kbdexamplefont % Allow @kbd to do something special.
                   4399:   \gobble       % eat return
                   4400: }
                   4401:
                   4402: % @example: Same as @lisp.
                   4403: \def\example{\begingroup \def\Eexample{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}\lisp}
                   4404:
                   4405: % @small... is usually equivalent to the non-small (@smallbook
                   4406: % redefines).  We must call \example (or whatever) last in the
                   4407: % definition, since it reads the return following the @example (or
                   4408: % whatever) command.
                   4409: %
                   4410: % This actually allows (for example) @end display inside an
                   4411: % @smalldisplay.  Too bad, but makeinfo will catch the error anyway.
                   4412: %
                   4413: \def\smalldisplay{\begingroup\def\Esmalldisplay{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}\display}
                   4414: \def\smallexample{\begingroup\def\Esmallexample{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}\lisp}
                   4415: \def\smallformat{\begingroup\def\Esmallformat{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}\format}
                   4416: \def\smalllisp{\begingroup\def\Esmalllisp{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}\lisp}
                   4417:
                   4418: % Real @smallexample and @smalllisp (when @smallbook): use smaller fonts.
                   4419: % Originally contributed by Pavel@xerox.
                   4420: \def\smalllispx{\begingroup
                   4421:   \def\Esmalllisp{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}%
                   4422:   \def\Esmallexample{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}%
                   4423:   \smallfonts
                   4424:   \lisp
                   4425: }
                   4426:
                   4427: % @display: same as @lisp except keep current font.
                   4428: %
                   4429: \def\display{\begingroup
                   4430:   \nonfillstart
                   4431:   \let\Edisplay = \nonfillfinish
                   4432:   \gobble
                   4433: }
                   4434:
                   4435: % @smalldisplay (when @smallbook): @display plus smaller fonts.
                   4436: %
                   4437: \def\smalldisplayx{\begingroup
                   4438:   \def\Esmalldisplay{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}%
                   4439:   \smallfonts \rm
                   4440:   \display
                   4441: }
                   4442:
                   4443: % @format: same as @display except don't narrow margins.
                   4444: %
                   4445: \def\format{\begingroup
                   4446:   \let\nonarrowing = t
                   4447:   \nonfillstart
                   4448:   \let\Eformat = \nonfillfinish
                   4449:   \gobble
                   4450: }
                   4451:
                   4452: % @smallformat (when @smallbook): @format plus smaller fonts.
                   4453: %
                   4454: \def\smallformatx{\begingroup
                   4455:   \def\Esmallformat{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}%
                   4456:   \smallfonts \rm
                   4457:   \format
                   4458: }
                   4459:
                   4460: % @flushleft (same as @format).
                   4461: %
                   4462: \def\flushleft{\begingroup \def\Eflushleft{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}\format}
                   4463:
                   4464: % @flushright.
                   4465: %
                   4466: \def\flushright{\begingroup
                   4467:   \let\nonarrowing = t
                   4468:   \nonfillstart
                   4469:   \let\Eflushright = \nonfillfinish
                   4470:   \advance\leftskip by 0pt plus 1fill
                   4471:   \gobble
                   4472: }
                   4473:
                   4474: % @quotation does normal linebreaking (hence we can't use \nonfillstart)
                   4475: % and narrows the margins.
                   4476: %
                   4477: \def\quotation{%
                   4478:   \begingroup\inENV %This group ends at the end of the @quotation body
                   4479:   {\parskip=0pt \aboveenvbreak}% because \aboveenvbreak inserts \parskip
                   4480:   \singlespace
                   4481:   \parindent=0pt
                   4482:   % We have retained a nonzero parskip for the environment, since we're
                   4483:   % doing normal filling. So to avoid extra space below the environment...
                   4484:   \def\Equotation{\parskip = 0pt \nonfillfinish}%
                   4485:   %
                   4486:   % @cartouche defines \nonarrowing to inhibit narrowing at next level down.
                   4487:   \ifx\nonarrowing\relax
                   4488:     \advance\leftskip by \lispnarrowing
                   4489:     \advance\rightskip by \lispnarrowing
                   4490:     \exdentamount = \lispnarrowing
                   4491:     \let\nonarrowing = \relax
                   4492:   \fi
                   4493: }
                   4494:
                   4495:
                   4496: \message{defuns,}
                   4497: % @defun etc.
                   4498:
                   4499: % Allow user to change definition object font (\df) internally
                   4500: \def\setdeffont #1 {\csname DEF#1\endcsname}
                   4501:
                   4502: \newskip\defbodyindent \defbodyindent=.4in
                   4503: \newskip\defargsindent \defargsindent=50pt
                   4504: \newskip\deftypemargin \deftypemargin=12pt
                   4505: \newskip\deflastargmargin \deflastargmargin=18pt
                   4506:
                   4507: \newcount\parencount
                   4508: % define \functionparens, which makes ( and ) and & do special things.
                   4509: % \functionparens affects the group it is contained in.
                   4510: \def\activeparens{%
                   4511: \catcode`\(=\active \catcode`\)=\active \catcode`\&=\active
                   4512: \catcode`\[=\active \catcode`\]=\active}
                   4513:
                   4514: % Make control sequences which act like normal parenthesis chars.
                   4515: \let\lparen = ( \let\rparen = )
                   4516:
                   4517: {\activeparens % Now, smart parens don't turn on until &foo (see \amprm)
                   4518:
                   4519: % Be sure that we always have a definition for `(', etc.  For example,
                   4520: % if the fn name has parens in it, \boldbrax will not be in effect yet,
                   4521: % so TeX would otherwise complain about undefined control sequence.
                   4522: \global\let(=\lparen \global\let)=\rparen
                   4523: \global\let[=\lbrack \global\let]=\rbrack
                   4524:
                   4525: \gdef\functionparens{\boldbrax\let&=\amprm\parencount=0 }
                   4526: \gdef\boldbrax{\let(=\opnr\let)=\clnr\let[=\lbrb\let]=\rbrb}
                   4527: % This is used to turn on special parens
                   4528: % but make & act ordinary (given that it's active).
                   4529: \gdef\boldbraxnoamp{\let(=\opnr\let)=\clnr\let[=\lbrb\let]=\rbrb\let&=\ampnr}
                   4530:
                   4531: % Definitions of (, ) and & used in args for functions.
                   4532: % This is the definition of ( outside of all parentheses.
                   4533: \gdef\oprm#1 {{\rm\char`\(}#1 \bf \let(=\opnested
                   4534:   \global\advance\parencount by 1
                   4535: }
                   4536: %
                   4537: % This is the definition of ( when already inside a level of parens.
                   4538: \gdef\opnested{\char`\(\global\advance\parencount by 1 }
                   4539: %
                   4540: \gdef\clrm{% Print a paren in roman if it is taking us back to depth of 0.
                   4541:   % also in that case restore the outer-level definition of (.
                   4542:   \ifnum \parencount=1 {\rm \char `\)}\sl \let(=\oprm \else \char `\) \fi
                   4543:   \global\advance \parencount by -1 }
                   4544: % If we encounter &foo, then turn on ()-hacking afterwards
                   4545: \gdef\amprm#1 {{\rm\&#1}\let(=\oprm \let)=\clrm\ }
                   4546: %
                   4547: \gdef\normalparens{\boldbrax\let&=\ampnr}
                   4548: } % End of definition inside \activeparens
                   4549: %% These parens (in \boldbrax) actually are a little bolder than the
                   4550: %% contained text.  This is especially needed for [ and ]
                   4551: \def\opnr{{\sf\char`\(}\global\advance\parencount by 1 }
                   4552: \def\clnr{{\sf\char`\)}\global\advance\parencount by -1 }
                   4553: \let\ampnr = \&
                   4554: \def\lbrb{{\bf\char`\[}}
                   4555: \def\rbrb{{\bf\char`\]}}
                   4556:
                   4557: % Active &'s sneak into the index arguments, so make sure it's defined.
                   4558: {
                   4559:   \catcode`& = 13
                   4560:   \global\let& = \ampnr
                   4561: }
                   4562:
                   4563: % First, defname, which formats the header line itself.
                   4564: % #1 should be the function name.
                   4565: % #2 should be the type of definition, such as "Function".
                   4566:
                   4567: \def\defname #1#2{%
                   4568: % Get the values of \leftskip and \rightskip as they were
                   4569: % outside the @def...
                   4570: \dimen2=\leftskip
                   4571: \advance\dimen2 by -\defbodyindent
                   4572: \noindent
                   4573: \setbox0=\hbox{\hskip \deflastargmargin{\rm #2}\hskip \deftypemargin}%
                   4574: \dimen0=\hsize \advance \dimen0 by -\wd0 % compute size for first line
                   4575: \dimen1=\hsize \advance \dimen1 by -\defargsindent %size for continuations
                   4576: \parshape 2 0in \dimen0 \defargsindent \dimen1
                   4577: % Now output arg 2 ("Function" or some such)
                   4578: % ending at \deftypemargin from the right margin,
                   4579: % but stuck inside a box of width 0 so it does not interfere with linebreaking
                   4580: {% Adjust \hsize to exclude the ambient margins,
                   4581: % so that \rightline will obey them.
                   4582: \advance \hsize by -\dimen2
                   4583: \rlap{\rightline{{\rm #2}\hskip -1.25pc }}}%
                   4584: % Make all lines underfull and no complaints:
                   4585: \tolerance=10000 \hbadness=10000
                   4586: \advance\leftskip by -\defbodyindent
                   4587: \exdentamount=\defbodyindent
                   4588: {\df #1}\enskip        % Generate function name
                   4589: }
                   4590:
                   4591: % Actually process the body of a definition
                   4592: % #1 should be the terminating control sequence, such as \Edefun.
                   4593: % #2 should be the "another name" control sequence, such as \defunx.
                   4594: % #3 should be the control sequence that actually processes the header,
                   4595: %    such as \defunheader.
                   4596:
                   4597: \def\defparsebody #1#2#3{\begingroup\inENV% Environment for definitionbody
                   4598: \medbreak %
                   4599: % Define the end token that this defining construct specifies
                   4600: % so that it will exit this group.
                   4601: \def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}%
                   4602: \def#2{\begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit#3}%
                   4603: \parindent=0in
                   4604: \advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent
                   4605: \exdentamount=\defbodyindent
                   4606: \begingroup %
                   4607: \catcode 61=\active % 61 is `='
                   4608: \obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit#3}
                   4609:
                   4610: % #1 is the \E... control sequence to end the definition (which we define).
                   4611: % #2 is the \...x control sequence for consecutive fns (which we define).
                   4612: % #3 is the control sequence to call to resume processing.
                   4613: % #4, delimited by the space, is the class name.
                   4614: %
                   4615: \def\defmethparsebody#1#2#3#4 {\begingroup\inENV %
                   4616: \medbreak %
                   4617: % Define the end token that this defining construct specifies
                   4618: % so that it will exit this group.
                   4619: \def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}%
                   4620: \def#2##1 {\begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{##1}}}%
                   4621: \parindent=0in
                   4622: \advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent
                   4623: \exdentamount=\defbodyindent
                   4624: \begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{#4}}}
                   4625:
                   4626: % Used for @deftypemethod and @deftypeivar.
                   4627: % #1 is the \E... control sequence to end the definition (which we define).
                   4628: % #2 is the \...x control sequence for consecutive fns (which we define).
                   4629: % #3 is the control sequence to call to resume processing.
                   4630: % #4, delimited by a space, is the class name.
                   4631: % #5 is the method's return type.
                   4632: %
                   4633: \def\deftypemethparsebody#1#2#3#4 #5 {\begingroup\inENV
                   4634:   \medbreak
                   4635:   \def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}%
                   4636:   \def#2##1 ##2 {\begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{##1}{##2}}}%
                   4637:   \parindent=0in
                   4638:   \advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent
                   4639:   \exdentamount=\defbodyindent
                   4640:   \begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{#4}{#5}}}
                   4641:
                   4642: % Used for @deftypeop.  The change from \deftypemethparsebody is an
                   4643: % extra argument at the beginning which is the `category', instead of it
                   4644: % being the hardwired string `Method' or `Instance Variable'.  We have
                   4645: % to account for this both in the \...x definition and in parsing the
                   4646: % input at hand.  Thus also need a control sequence (passed as #5) for
                   4647: % the \E... definition to assign the category name to.
                   4648: %
                   4649: \def\deftypeopparsebody#1#2#3#4#5 #6 {\begingroup\inENV
                   4650:   \medbreak
                   4651:   \def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}%
                   4652:   \def#2##1 ##2 ##3 {%
                   4653:     \def#4{##1}%
                   4654:     \begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{##2}{##3}}}%
                   4655:   \parindent=0in
                   4656:   \advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent
                   4657:   \exdentamount=\defbodyindent
                   4658:   \begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{#5}{#6}}}
                   4659:
                   4660: \def\defopparsebody #1#2#3#4#5 {\begingroup\inENV %
                   4661: \medbreak %
                   4662: % Define the end token that this defining construct specifies
                   4663: % so that it will exit this group.
                   4664: \def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}%
                   4665: \def#2##1 ##2 {\def#4{##1}%
                   4666: \begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{##2}}}%
                   4667: \parindent=0in
                   4668: \advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent
                   4669: \exdentamount=\defbodyindent
                   4670: \begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{#5}}}
                   4671:
                   4672: % These parsing functions are similar to the preceding ones
                   4673: % except that they do not make parens into active characters.
                   4674: % These are used for "variables" since they have no arguments.
                   4675:
                   4676: \def\defvarparsebody #1#2#3{\begingroup\inENV% Environment for definitionbody
                   4677: \medbreak %
                   4678: % Define the end token that this defining construct specifies
                   4679: % so that it will exit this group.
                   4680: \def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}%
                   4681: \def#2{\begingroup\obeylines\spacesplit#3}%
                   4682: \parindent=0in
                   4683: \advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent
                   4684: \exdentamount=\defbodyindent
                   4685: \begingroup %
                   4686: \catcode 61=\active %
                   4687: \obeylines\spacesplit#3}
                   4688:
                   4689: % This is used for \def{tp,vr}parsebody.  It could probably be used for
                   4690: % some of the others, too, with some judicious conditionals.
                   4691: %
                   4692: \def\parsebodycommon#1#2#3{%
                   4693:   \begingroup\inENV %
                   4694:   \medbreak %
                   4695:   % Define the end token that this defining construct specifies
                   4696:   % so that it will exit this group.
                   4697:   \def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}%
                   4698:   \def#2##1 {\begingroup\obeylines\spacesplit{#3{##1}}}%
                   4699:   \parindent=0in
                   4700:   \advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent
                   4701:   \exdentamount=\defbodyindent
                   4702:   \begingroup\obeylines
                   4703: }
                   4704:
                   4705: \def\defvrparsebody#1#2#3#4 {%
                   4706:   \parsebodycommon{#1}{#2}{#3}%
                   4707:   \spacesplit{#3{#4}}%
                   4708: }
                   4709:
                   4710: % This loses on `@deftp {Data Type} {struct termios}' -- it thinks the
                   4711: % type is just `struct', because we lose the braces in `{struct
                   4712: % termios}' when \spacesplit reads its undelimited argument.  Sigh.
                   4713: % \let\deftpparsebody=\defvrparsebody
                   4714: %
                   4715: % So, to get around this, we put \empty in with the type name.  That
                   4716: % way, TeX won't find exactly `{...}' as an undelimited argument, and
                   4717: % won't strip off the braces.
                   4718: %
                   4719: \def\deftpparsebody #1#2#3#4 {%
                   4720:   \parsebodycommon{#1}{#2}{#3}%
                   4721:   \spacesplit{\parsetpheaderline{#3{#4}}}\empty
                   4722: }
                   4723:
                   4724: % Fine, but then we have to eventually remove the \empty *and* the
                   4725: % braces (if any).  That's what this does.
                   4726: %
                   4727: \def\removeemptybraces\empty#1\relax{#1}
                   4728:
                   4729: % After \spacesplit has done its work, this is called -- #1 is the final
                   4730: % thing to call, #2 the type name (which starts with \empty), and #3
                   4731: % (which might be empty) the arguments.
                   4732: %
                   4733: \def\parsetpheaderline#1#2#3{%
                   4734:   #1{\removeemptybraces#2\relax}{#3}%
                   4735: }%
                   4736:
                   4737: \def\defopvarparsebody #1#2#3#4#5 {\begingroup\inENV %
                   4738: \medbreak %
                   4739: % Define the end token that this defining construct specifies
                   4740: % so that it will exit this group.
                   4741: \def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}%
                   4742: \def#2##1 ##2 {\def#4{##1}%
                   4743: \begingroup\obeylines\spacesplit{#3{##2}}}%
                   4744: \parindent=0in
                   4745: \advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent
                   4746: \exdentamount=\defbodyindent
                   4747: \begingroup\obeylines\spacesplit{#3{#5}}}
                   4748:
                   4749: % Split up #2 at the first space token.
                   4750: % call #1 with two arguments:
                   4751: %  the first is all of #2 before the space token,
                   4752: %  the second is all of #2 after that space token.
                   4753: % If #2 contains no space token, all of it is passed as the first arg
                   4754: % and the second is passed as empty.
                   4755:
                   4756: {\obeylines
                   4757: \gdef\spacesplit#1#2^^M{\endgroup\spacesplitfoo{#1}#2 \relax\spacesplitfoo}%
                   4758: \long\gdef\spacesplitfoo#1#2 #3#4\spacesplitfoo{%
                   4759: \ifx\relax #3%
                   4760: #1{#2}{}\else #1{#2}{#3#4}\fi}}
                   4761:
                   4762: % So much for the things common to all kinds of definitions.
                   4763:
                   4764: % Define @defun.
                   4765:
                   4766: % First, define the processing that is wanted for arguments of \defun
                   4767: % Use this to expand the args and terminate the paragraph they make up
                   4768:
                   4769: \def\defunargs#1{\functionparens \sl
                   4770: % Expand, preventing hyphenation at `-' chars.
                   4771: % Note that groups don't affect changes in \hyphenchar.
                   4772: % Set the font temporarily and use \font in case \setfont made \tensl a macro.
                   4773: {\tensl\hyphenchar\font=0}%
                   4774: #1%
                   4775: {\tensl\hyphenchar\font=45}%
                   4776: \ifnum\parencount=0 \else \errmessage{Unbalanced parentheses in @def}\fi%
                   4777: \interlinepenalty=10000
                   4778: \advance\rightskip by 0pt plus 1fil
                   4779: \endgraf\nobreak\vskip -\parskip\nobreak
                   4780: }
                   4781:
                   4782: \def\deftypefunargs #1{%
                   4783: % Expand, preventing hyphenation at `-' chars.
                   4784: % Note that groups don't affect changes in \hyphenchar.
                   4785: % Use \boldbraxnoamp, not \functionparens, so that & is not special.
                   4786: \boldbraxnoamp
                   4787: \tclose{#1}% avoid \code because of side effects on active chars
                   4788: \interlinepenalty=10000
                   4789: \advance\rightskip by 0pt plus 1fil
                   4790: \endgraf\nobreak\vskip -\parskip\nobreak
                   4791: }
                   4792:
                   4793: % Do complete processing of one @defun or @defunx line already parsed.
                   4794:
                   4795: % @deffn Command forward-char nchars
                   4796:
                   4797: \def\deffn{\defmethparsebody\Edeffn\deffnx\deffnheader}
                   4798:
                   4799: \def\deffnheader #1#2#3{\doind {fn}{\code{#2}}%
                   4800: \begingroup\defname {#2}{#1}\defunargs{#3}\endgroup %
                   4801: \catcode 61=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody
                   4802: }
                   4803:
                   4804: % @defun == @deffn Function
                   4805:
                   4806: \def\defun{\defparsebody\Edefun\defunx\defunheader}
                   4807:
                   4808: \def\defunheader #1#2{\doind {fn}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in function index
                   4809: \begingroup\defname {#1}{\putwordDeffunc}%
                   4810: \defunargs {#2}\endgroup %
                   4811: \catcode 61=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody
                   4812: }
                   4813:
                   4814: % @deftypefun int foobar (int @var{foo}, float @var{bar})
                   4815:
                   4816: \def\deftypefun{\defparsebody\Edeftypefun\deftypefunx\deftypefunheader}
                   4817:
                   4818: % #1 is the data type.  #2 is the name and args.
                   4819: \def\deftypefunheader #1#2{\deftypefunheaderx{#1}#2 \relax}
                   4820: % #1 is the data type, #2 the name, #3 the args.
                   4821: \def\deftypefunheaderx #1#2 #3\relax{%
                   4822: \doind {fn}{\code{#2}}% Make entry in function index
                   4823: \begingroup\defname {\defheaderxcond#1\relax$$$#2}{\putwordDeftypefun}%
                   4824: \deftypefunargs {#3}\endgroup %
                   4825: \catcode 61=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody
                   4826: }
                   4827:
                   4828: % @deftypefn {Library Function} int foobar (int @var{foo}, float @var{bar})
                   4829:
                   4830: \def\deftypefn{\defmethparsebody\Edeftypefn\deftypefnx\deftypefnheader}
                   4831:
                   4832: % \defheaderxcond#1\relax$$$
                   4833: % puts #1 in @code, followed by a space, but does nothing if #1 is null.
                   4834: \def\defheaderxcond#1#2$$${\ifx#1\relax\else\code{#1#2} \fi}
                   4835:
                   4836: % #1 is the classification.  #2 is the data type.  #3 is the name and args.
                   4837: \def\deftypefnheader #1#2#3{\deftypefnheaderx{#1}{#2}#3 \relax}
                   4838: % #1 is the classification, #2 the data type, #3 the name, #4 the args.
                   4839: \def\deftypefnheaderx #1#2#3 #4\relax{%
                   4840: \doind {fn}{\code{#3}}% Make entry in function index
                   4841: \begingroup
                   4842: \normalparens % notably, turn off `&' magic, which prevents
                   4843: %               at least some C++ text from working
                   4844: \defname {\defheaderxcond#2\relax$$$#3}{#1}%
                   4845: \deftypefunargs {#4}\endgroup %
                   4846: \catcode 61=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody
                   4847: }
                   4848:
                   4849: % @defmac == @deffn Macro
                   4850:
                   4851: \def\defmac{\defparsebody\Edefmac\defmacx\defmacheader}
                   4852:
                   4853: \def\defmacheader #1#2{\doind {fn}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in function index
                   4854: \begingroup\defname {#1}{\putwordDefmac}%
                   4855: \defunargs {#2}\endgroup %
                   4856: \catcode 61=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody
                   4857: }
                   4858:
                   4859: % @defspec == @deffn Special Form
                   4860:
                   4861: \def\defspec{\defparsebody\Edefspec\defspecx\defspecheader}
                   4862:
                   4863: \def\defspecheader #1#2{\doind {fn}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in function index
                   4864: \begingroup\defname {#1}{\putwordDefspec}%
                   4865: \defunargs {#2}\endgroup %
                   4866: \catcode 61=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody
                   4867: }
                   4868:
                   4869: % @defop CATEGORY CLASS OPERATION ARG...
                   4870: %
                   4871: \def\defop #1 {\def\defoptype{#1}%
                   4872: \defopparsebody\Edefop\defopx\defopheader\defoptype}
                   4873: %
                   4874: \def\defopheader#1#2#3{%
                   4875: \dosubind {fn}{\code{#2}}{\putwordon\ #1}% Make entry in function index
                   4876: \begingroup\defname {#2}{\defoptype\ \putwordon\ #1}%
                   4877: \defunargs {#3}\endgroup %
                   4878: }
                   4879:
                   4880: % @deftypeop CATEGORY CLASS TYPE OPERATION ARG...
                   4881: %
                   4882: \def\deftypeop #1 {\def\deftypeopcategory{#1}%
                   4883:   \deftypeopparsebody\Edeftypeop\deftypeopx\deftypeopheader
                   4884:                        \deftypeopcategory}
                   4885: %
                   4886: % #1 is the class name, #2 the data type, #3 the operation name, #4 the args.
                   4887: \def\deftypeopheader#1#2#3#4{%
                   4888:   \dosubind{fn}{\code{#3}}{\putwordon\ \code{#1}}% entry in function index
                   4889:   \begingroup
                   4890:     \defname{\defheaderxcond#2\relax$$$#3}
                   4891:             {\deftypeopcategory\ \putwordon\ \code{#1}}%
                   4892:     \deftypefunargs{#4}%
                   4893:   \endgroup
                   4894: }
                   4895:
                   4896: % @deftypemethod CLASS TYPE METHOD ARG...
                   4897: %
                   4898: \def\deftypemethod{%
                   4899:   \deftypemethparsebody\Edeftypemethod\deftypemethodx\deftypemethodheader}
                   4900: %
                   4901: % #1 is the class name, #2 the data type, #3 the method name, #4 the args.
                   4902: \def\deftypemethodheader#1#2#3#4{%
                   4903:   \dosubind{fn}{\code{#3}}{\putwordon\ \code{#1}}% entry in function index
                   4904:   \begingroup
                   4905:     \defname{\defheaderxcond#2\relax$$$#3}{\putwordMethodon\ \code{#1}}%
                   4906:     \deftypefunargs{#4}%
                   4907:   \endgroup
                   4908: }
                   4909:
                   4910: % @deftypeivar CLASS TYPE VARNAME
                   4911: %
                   4912: \def\deftypeivar{%
                   4913:   \deftypemethparsebody\Edeftypeivar\deftypeivarx\deftypeivarheader}
                   4914: %
                   4915: % #1 is the class name, #2 the data type, #3 the variable name.
                   4916: \def\deftypeivarheader#1#2#3{%
                   4917:   \dosubind{vr}{\code{#3}}{\putwordof\ \code{#1}}% entry in variable index
                   4918:   \begingroup
                   4919:     \defname{#3}{\putwordInstanceVariableof\ \code{#1}}%
                   4920:     \defvarargs{#3}%
                   4921:   \endgroup
                   4922: }
                   4923:
                   4924: % @defmethod == @defop Method
                   4925: %
                   4926: \def\defmethod{\defmethparsebody\Edefmethod\defmethodx\defmethodheader}
                   4927: %
                   4928: % #1 is the class name, #2 the method name, #3 the args.
                   4929: \def\defmethodheader#1#2#3{%
                   4930:   \dosubind{fn}{\code{#2}}{\putwordon\ \code{#1}}% entry in function index
                   4931:   \begingroup
                   4932:     \defname{#2}{\putwordMethodon\ \code{#1}}%
                   4933:     \defunargs{#3}%
                   4934:   \endgroup
                   4935: }
                   4936:
                   4937: % @defcv {Class Option} foo-class foo-flag
                   4938:
                   4939: \def\defcv #1 {\def\defcvtype{#1}%
                   4940: \defopvarparsebody\Edefcv\defcvx\defcvarheader\defcvtype}
                   4941:
                   4942: \def\defcvarheader #1#2#3{%
                   4943: \dosubind {vr}{\code{#2}}{\putwordof\ #1}% Make entry in var index
                   4944: \begingroup\defname {#2}{\defcvtype\ \putwordof\ #1}%
                   4945: \defvarargs {#3}\endgroup %
                   4946: }
                   4947:
                   4948: % @defivar CLASS VARNAME == @defcv {Instance Variable} CLASS VARNAME
                   4949: %
                   4950: \def\defivar{\defvrparsebody\Edefivar\defivarx\defivarheader}
                   4951: %
                   4952: \def\defivarheader#1#2#3{%
                   4953:   \dosubind {vr}{\code{#2}}{\putwordof\ #1}% entry in var index
                   4954:   \begingroup
                   4955:     \defname{#2}{\putwordInstanceVariableof\ #1}%
                   4956:     \defvarargs{#3}%
                   4957:   \endgroup
                   4958: }
                   4959:
                   4960: % @defvar
                   4961: % First, define the processing that is wanted for arguments of @defvar.
                   4962: % This is actually simple: just print them in roman.
                   4963: % This must expand the args and terminate the paragraph they make up
                   4964: \def\defvarargs #1{\normalparens #1%
                   4965: \interlinepenalty=10000
                   4966: \endgraf\nobreak\vskip -\parskip\nobreak}
                   4967:
                   4968: % @defvr Counter foo-count
                   4969:
                   4970: \def\defvr{\defvrparsebody\Edefvr\defvrx\defvrheader}
                   4971:
                   4972: \def\defvrheader #1#2#3{\doind {vr}{\code{#2}}%
                   4973: \begingroup\defname {#2}{#1}\defvarargs{#3}\endgroup}
                   4974:
                   4975: % @defvar == @defvr Variable
                   4976:
                   4977: \def\defvar{\defvarparsebody\Edefvar\defvarx\defvarheader}
                   4978:
                   4979: \def\defvarheader #1#2{\doind {vr}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in var index
                   4980: \begingroup\defname {#1}{\putwordDefvar}%
                   4981: \defvarargs {#2}\endgroup %
                   4982: }
                   4983:
                   4984: % @defopt == @defvr {User Option}
                   4985:
                   4986: \def\defopt{\defvarparsebody\Edefopt\defoptx\defoptheader}
                   4987:
                   4988: \def\defoptheader #1#2{\doind {vr}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in var index
                   4989: \begingroup\defname {#1}{\putwordDefopt}%
                   4990: \defvarargs {#2}\endgroup %
                   4991: }
                   4992:
                   4993: % @deftypevar int foobar
                   4994:
                   4995: \def\deftypevar{\defvarparsebody\Edeftypevar\deftypevarx\deftypevarheader}
                   4996:
                   4997: % #1 is the data type.  #2 is the name, perhaps followed by text that
                   4998: % is actually part of the data type, which should not be put into the index.
                   4999: \def\deftypevarheader #1#2{%
                   5000: \dovarind#2 \relax% Make entry in variables index
                   5001: \begingroup\defname {\defheaderxcond#1\relax$$$#2}{\putwordDeftypevar}%
                   5002: \interlinepenalty=10000
                   5003: \endgraf\nobreak\vskip -\parskip\nobreak
                   5004: \endgroup}
                   5005: \def\dovarind#1 #2\relax{\doind{vr}{\code{#1}}}
                   5006:
                   5007: % @deftypevr {Global Flag} int enable
                   5008:
                   5009: \def\deftypevr{\defvrparsebody\Edeftypevr\deftypevrx\deftypevrheader}
                   5010:
                   5011: \def\deftypevrheader #1#2#3{\dovarind#3 \relax%
                   5012: \begingroup\defname {\defheaderxcond#2\relax$$$#3}{#1}
                   5013: \interlinepenalty=10000
                   5014: \endgraf\nobreak\vskip -\parskip\nobreak
                   5015: \endgroup}
                   5016:
                   5017: % Now define @deftp
                   5018: % Args are printed in bold, a slight difference from @defvar.
                   5019:
                   5020: \def\deftpargs #1{\bf \defvarargs{#1}}
                   5021:
                   5022: % @deftp Class window height width ...
                   5023:
                   5024: \def\deftp{\deftpparsebody\Edeftp\deftpx\deftpheader}
                   5025:
                   5026: \def\deftpheader #1#2#3{\doind {tp}{\code{#2}}%
                   5027: \begingroup\defname {#2}{#1}\deftpargs{#3}\endgroup}
                   5028:
                   5029: % These definitions are used if you use @defunx (etc.)
                   5030: % anywhere other than immediately after a @defun or @defunx.
                   5031: %
                   5032: \def\defcvx#1 {\errmessage{@defcvx in invalid context}}
                   5033: \def\deffnx#1 {\errmessage{@deffnx in invalid context}}
                   5034: \def\defivarx#1 {\errmessage{@defivarx in invalid context}}
                   5035: \def\defmacx#1 {\errmessage{@defmacx in invalid context}}
                   5036: \def\defmethodx#1 {\errmessage{@defmethodx in invalid context}}
                   5037: \def\defoptx #1 {\errmessage{@defoptx in invalid context}}
                   5038: \def\defopx#1 {\errmessage{@defopx in invalid context}}
                   5039: \def\defspecx#1 {\errmessage{@defspecx in invalid context}}
                   5040: \def\deftpx#1 {\errmessage{@deftpx in invalid context}}
                   5041: \def\deftypefnx#1 {\errmessage{@deftypefnx in invalid context}}
                   5042: \def\deftypefunx#1 {\errmessage{@deftypefunx in invalid context}}
                   5043: \def\deftypeivarx#1 {\errmessage{@deftypeivarx in invalid context}}
                   5044: \def\deftypemethodx#1 {\errmessage{@deftypemethodx in invalid context}}
                   5045: \def\deftypeopx#1 {\errmessage{@deftypeopx in invalid context}}
                   5046: \def\deftypevarx#1 {\errmessage{@deftypevarx in invalid context}}
                   5047: \def\deftypevrx#1 {\errmessage{@deftypevrx in invalid context}}
                   5048: \def\defunx#1 {\errmessage{@defunx in invalid context}}
                   5049: \def\defvarx#1 {\errmessage{@defvarx in invalid context}}
                   5050: \def\defvrx#1 {\errmessage{@defvrx in invalid context}}
                   5051:
                   5052:
                   5053: \message{macros,}
                   5054: % @macro.
                   5055:
                   5056: % To do this right we need a feature of e-TeX, \scantokens,
                   5057: % which we arrange to emulate with a temporary file in ordinary TeX.
                   5058: \ifx\eTeXversion\undefined
                   5059:  \newwrite\macscribble
                   5060:  \def\scanmacro#1{%
                   5061:    \begingroup \newlinechar`\^^M
                   5062:    % Undo catcode changes of \startcontents and \doprintindex
                   5063:    \catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=12 \escapechar=`\@
                   5064:    % Append \endinput to make sure that TeX does not see the ending newline.
                   5065:    \toks0={#1\endinput}%
                   5066:    \immediate\openout\macscribble=\jobname.tmp
                   5067:    \immediate\write\macscribble{\the\toks0}%
                   5068:    \immediate\closeout\macscribble
                   5069:    \let\xeatspaces\eatspaces
                   5070:    \input \jobname.tmp
                   5071:    \endgroup
                   5072: }
                   5073: \else
                   5074: \def\scanmacro#1{%
                   5075: \begingroup \newlinechar`\^^M
                   5076: % Undo catcode changes of \startcontents and \doprintindex
                   5077: \catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=12 \escapechar=`\@
                   5078: \let\xeatspaces\eatspaces\scantokens{#1\endinput}\endgroup}
                   5079: \fi
                   5080:
                   5081: \newcount\paramno   % Count of parameters
                   5082: \newtoks\macname    % Macro name
                   5083: \newif\ifrecursive  % Is it recursive?
                   5084: \def\macrolist{}    % List of all defined macros in the form
                   5085:                     % \do\macro1\do\macro2...
                   5086:
                   5087: % Utility routines.
                   5088: % Thisdoes \let #1 = #2, except with \csnames.
                   5089: \def\cslet#1#2{%
                   5090: \expandafter\expandafter
                   5091: \expandafter\let
                   5092: \expandafter\expandafter
                   5093: \csname#1\endcsname
                   5094: \csname#2\endcsname}
                   5095:
                   5096: % Trim leading and trailing spaces off a string.
                   5097: % Concepts from aro-bend problem 15 (see CTAN).
                   5098: {\catcode`\@=11
                   5099: \gdef\eatspaces #1{\expandafter\trim@\expandafter{#1 }}
                   5100: \gdef\trim@ #1{\trim@@ @#1 @ #1 @ @@}
                   5101: \gdef\trim@@ #1@ #2@ #3@@{\trim@@@\empty #2 @}
                   5102: \def\unbrace#1{#1}
                   5103: \unbrace{\gdef\trim@@@ #1 } #2@{#1}
                   5104: }
                   5105:
                   5106: % Trim a single trailing ^^M off a string.
                   5107: {\catcode`\^^M=12\catcode`\Q=3%
                   5108: \gdef\eatcr #1{\eatcra #1Q^^MQ}%
                   5109: \gdef\eatcra#1^^MQ{\eatcrb#1Q}%
                   5110: \gdef\eatcrb#1Q#2Q{#1}%
                   5111: }
                   5112:
                   5113: % Macro bodies are absorbed as an argument in a context where
                   5114: % all characters are catcode 10, 11 or 12, except \ which is active
                   5115: % (as in normal texinfo). It is necessary to change the definition of \.
                   5116:
                   5117: % It's necessary to have hard CRs when the macro is executed. This is
                   5118: % done by  making ^^M (\endlinechar) catcode 12 when reading the macro
                   5119: % body, and then making it the \newlinechar in \scanmacro.
                   5120:
                   5121: \def\macrobodyctxt{%
                   5122:   \catcode`\~=12
                   5123:   \catcode`\^=12
                   5124:   \catcode`\_=12
                   5125:   \catcode`\|=12
                   5126:   \catcode`\<=12
                   5127:   \catcode`\>=12
                   5128:   \catcode`\+=12
                   5129:   \catcode`\{=12
                   5130:   \catcode`\}=12
                   5131:   \catcode`\@=12
                   5132:   \catcode`\^^M=12
                   5133:   \usembodybackslash}
                   5134:
                   5135: \def\macroargctxt{%
                   5136:   \catcode`\~=12
                   5137:   \catcode`\^=12
                   5138:   \catcode`\_=12
                   5139:   \catcode`\|=12
                   5140:   \catcode`\<=12
                   5141:   \catcode`\>=12
                   5142:   \catcode`\+=12
                   5143:   \catcode`\@=12
                   5144:   \catcode`\\=12}
                   5145:
                   5146: % \mbodybackslash is the definition of \ in @macro bodies.
                   5147: % It maps \foo\ => \csname macarg.foo\endcsname => #N
                   5148: % where N is the macro parameter number.
                   5149: % We define \csname macarg.\endcsname to be \realbackslash, so
                   5150: % \\ in macro replacement text gets you a backslash.
                   5151:
                   5152: {\catcode`@=0 @catcode`@\=@active
                   5153:  @gdef@usembodybackslash{@let\=@mbodybackslash}
                   5154:  @gdef@mbodybackslash#1\{@csname macarg.#1@endcsname}
                   5155: }
                   5156: \expandafter\def\csname macarg.\endcsname{\realbackslash}
                   5157:
                   5158: \def\macro{\recursivefalse\parsearg\macroxxx}
                   5159: \def\rmacro{\recursivetrue\parsearg\macroxxx}
                   5160:
                   5161: \def\macroxxx#1{%
                   5162:   \getargs{#1}%           now \macname is the macname and \argl the arglist
                   5163:   \ifx\argl\empty       % no arguments
                   5164:      \paramno=0%
                   5165:   \else
                   5166:      \expandafter\parsemargdef \argl;%
                   5167:   \fi
                   5168:   \if1\csname ismacro.\the\macname\endcsname
                   5169:      \message{Warning: redefining \the\macname}%
                   5170:   \else
                   5171:      \expandafter\ifx\csname \the\macname\endcsname \relax
                   5172:      \else \errmessage{The name \the\macname\space is reserved}\fi
                   5173:      \global\cslet{macsave.\the\macname}{\the\macname}%
                   5174:      \global\expandafter\let\csname ismacro.\the\macname\endcsname=1%
                   5175:      % Add the macroname to \macrolist
                   5176:      \toks0 = \expandafter{\macrolist\do}%
                   5177:      \xdef\macrolist{\the\toks0
                   5178:        \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname\endcsname}%
                   5179:   \fi
                   5180:   \begingroup \macrobodyctxt
                   5181:   \ifrecursive \expandafter\parsermacbody
                   5182:   \else \expandafter\parsemacbody
                   5183:   \fi}
                   5184:
                   5185: \def\unmacro{\parsearg\unmacroxxx}
                   5186: \def\unmacroxxx#1{%
                   5187:   \if1\csname ismacro.#1\endcsname
                   5188:     \global\cslet{#1}{macsave.#1}%
                   5189:     \global\expandafter\let \csname ismacro.#1\endcsname=0%
                   5190:     % Remove the macro name from \macrolist
                   5191:     \begingroup
                   5192:       \edef\tempa{\expandafter\noexpand\csname#1\endcsname}%
                   5193:       \def\do##1{%
                   5194:         \def\tempb{##1}%
                   5195:         \ifx\tempa\tempb
                   5196:           % remove this
                   5197:         \else
                   5198:           \toks0 = \expandafter{\newmacrolist\do}%
                   5199:           \edef\newmacrolist{\the\toks0\expandafter\noexpand\tempa}%
                   5200:         \fi}%
                   5201:       \def\newmacrolist{}%
                   5202:       % Execute macro list to define \newmacrolist
                   5203:       \macrolist
                   5204:       \global\let\macrolist\newmacrolist
                   5205:     \endgroup
                   5206:   \else
                   5207:     \errmessage{Macro #1 not defined}%
                   5208:   \fi
                   5209: }
                   5210:
                   5211: % This makes use of the obscure feature that if the last token of a
                   5212: % <parameter list> is #, then the preceding argument is delimited by
                   5213: % an opening brace, and that opening brace is not consumed.
                   5214: \def\getargs#1{\getargsxxx#1{}}
                   5215: \def\getargsxxx#1#{\getmacname #1 \relax\getmacargs}
                   5216: \def\getmacname #1 #2\relax{\macname={#1}}
                   5217: \def\getmacargs#1{\def\argl{#1}}
                   5218:
                   5219: % Parse the optional {params} list.  Set up \paramno and \paramlist
                   5220: % so \defmacro knows what to do.  Define \macarg.blah for each blah
                   5221: % in the params list, to be ##N where N is the position in that list.
                   5222: % That gets used by \mbodybackslash (above).
                   5223:
                   5224: % We need to get `macro parameter char #' into several definitions.
                   5225: % The technique used is stolen from LaTeX:  let \hash be something
                   5226: % unexpandable, insert that wherever you need a #, and then redefine
                   5227: % it to # just before using the token list produced.
                   5228: %
                   5229: % The same technique is used to protect \eatspaces till just before
                   5230: % the macro is used.
                   5231:
                   5232: \def\parsemargdef#1;{\paramno=0\def\paramlist{}%
                   5233:         \let\hash\relax\let\xeatspaces\relax\parsemargdefxxx#1,;,}
                   5234: \def\parsemargdefxxx#1,{%
                   5235:   \if#1;\let\next=\relax
                   5236:   \else \let\next=\parsemargdefxxx
                   5237:     \advance\paramno by 1%
                   5238:     \expandafter\edef\csname macarg.\eatspaces{#1}\endcsname
                   5239:         {\xeatspaces{\hash\the\paramno}}%
                   5240:     \edef\paramlist{\paramlist\hash\the\paramno,}%
                   5241:   \fi\next}
                   5242:
                   5243: % These two commands read recursive and nonrecursive macro bodies.
                   5244: % (They're different since rec and nonrec macros end differently.)
                   5245:
                   5246: \long\def\parsemacbody#1@end macro%
                   5247: {\xdef\temp{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\defmacro}%
                   5248: \long\def\parsermacbody#1@end rmacro%
                   5249: {\xdef\temp{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\defmacro}%
                   5250:
                   5251: % This defines the macro itself. There are six cases: recursive and
                   5252: % nonrecursive macros of zero, one, and many arguments.
                   5253: % Much magic with \expandafter here.
                   5254: % \xdef is used so that macro definitions will survive the file
                   5255: % they're defined in; @include reads the file inside a group.
                   5256: \def\defmacro{%
                   5257:   \let\hash=##% convert placeholders to macro parameter chars
                   5258:   \ifrecursive
                   5259:     \ifcase\paramno
                   5260:     % 0
                   5261:       \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
                   5262:         \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}%
                   5263:     \or % 1
                   5264:       \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
                   5265:          \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
                   5266:          \noexpand\braceorline
                   5267:          \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname}%
                   5268:       \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname##1{%
                   5269:          \egroup\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}%
                   5270:     \else % many
                   5271:       \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
                   5272:          \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
                   5273:          \noexpand\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname}%
                   5274:       \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname##1{%
                   5275:           \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname ##1,}%
                   5276:       \expandafter\expandafter
                   5277:       \expandafter\xdef
                   5278:       \expandafter\expandafter
                   5279:         \csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname
                   5280:           \paramlist{\egroup\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}%
                   5281:     \fi
                   5282:   \else
                   5283:     \ifcase\paramno
                   5284:     % 0
                   5285:       \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
                   5286:         \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}%
                   5287:         \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}%
                   5288:     \or % 1
                   5289:       \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
                   5290:          \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
                   5291:          \noexpand\braceorline
                   5292:          \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname}%
                   5293:       \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname##1{%
                   5294:         \egroup
                   5295:         \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}%
                   5296:         \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}%
                   5297:     \else % many
                   5298:       \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
                   5299:          \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
                   5300:          \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname}%
                   5301:       \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname##1{%
                   5302:           \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname ##1,}%
                   5303:       \expandafter\expandafter
                   5304:       \expandafter\xdef
                   5305:       \expandafter\expandafter
                   5306:       \csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname
                   5307:       \paramlist{%
                   5308:           \egroup
                   5309:           \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}%
                   5310:           \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}%
                   5311:     \fi
                   5312:   \fi}
                   5313:
                   5314: \def\norecurse#1{\bgroup\cslet{#1}{macsave.#1}}
                   5315:
                   5316: % \braceorline decides whether the next nonwhitespace character is a
                   5317: % {.  If so it reads up to the closing }, if not, it reads the whole
                   5318: % line.  Whatever was read is then fed to the next control sequence
                   5319: % as an argument (by \parsebrace or \parsearg)
                   5320: \def\braceorline#1{\let\next=#1\futurelet\nchar\braceorlinexxx}
                   5321: \def\braceorlinexxx{%
                   5322:   \ifx\nchar\bgroup\else
                   5323:     \expandafter\parsearg
                   5324:   \fi \next}
                   5325:
                   5326: % We mant to disable all macros during \shipout so that they are not
                   5327: % expanded by \write.
                   5328: \def\turnoffmacros{\begingroup \def\do##1{\let\noexpand##1=\relax}%
                   5329:   \edef\next{\macrolist}\expandafter\endgroup\next}
                   5330:
                   5331:
                   5332: % @alias.
                   5333: % We need some trickery to remove the optional spaces around the equal
                   5334: % sign.  Just make them active and then expand them all to nothing.
                   5335: \def\alias{\begingroup\obeyspaces\parsearg\aliasxxx}
                   5336: \def\aliasxxx #1{\aliasyyy#1\relax}
                   5337: \def\aliasyyy #1=#2\relax{\ignoreactivespaces
                   5338: \edef\next{\global\let\expandafter\noexpand\csname#1\endcsname=%
                   5339:            \expandafter\noexpand\csname#2\endcsname}%
                   5340: \expandafter\endgroup\next}
                   5341:
                   5342:
                   5343: \message{cross references,}
                   5344: % @xref etc.
                   5345:
                   5346: \newwrite\auxfile
                   5347:
                   5348: \newif\ifhavexrefs    % True if xref values are known.
                   5349: \newif\ifwarnedxrefs  % True if we warned once that they aren't known.
                   5350:
                   5351: % @inforef is relatively simple.
                   5352: \def\inforef #1{\inforefzzz #1,,,,**}
                   5353: \def\inforefzzz #1,#2,#3,#4**{\putwordSee{} \putwordInfo{} \putwordfile{} \file{\ignorespaces #3{}},
                   5354:   node \samp{\ignorespaces#1{}}}
                   5355:
                   5356: % @node's job is to define \lastnode.
                   5357: \def\node{\ENVcheck\parsearg\nodezzz}
                   5358: \def\nodezzz#1{\nodexxx [#1,]}
                   5359: \def\nodexxx[#1,#2]{\gdef\lastnode{#1}}
                   5360: \let\nwnode=\node
                   5361: \let\lastnode=\relax
                   5362:
                   5363: % The sectioning commands (@chapter, etc.) call these.
                   5364: \def\donoderef{%
                   5365:   \ifx\lastnode\relax\else
                   5366:     \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\setref{\lastnode}%
                   5367:       {Ysectionnumberandtype}%
                   5368:     \global\let\lastnode=\relax
                   5369:   \fi
                   5370: }
                   5371: \def\unnumbnoderef{%
                   5372:   \ifx\lastnode\relax\else
                   5373:     \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\setref{\lastnode}{Ynothing}%
                   5374:     \global\let\lastnode=\relax
                   5375:   \fi
                   5376: }
                   5377: \def\appendixnoderef{%
                   5378:   \ifx\lastnode\relax\else
                   5379:     \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\setref{\lastnode}%
                   5380:       {Yappendixletterandtype}%
                   5381:     \global\let\lastnode=\relax
                   5382:   \fi
                   5383: }
                   5384:
                   5385:
                   5386: % @anchor{NAME} -- define xref target at arbitrary point.
                   5387: %
                   5388: \newcount\savesfregister
                   5389: \gdef\savesf{\relax \ifhmode \savesfregister=\spacefactor \fi}
                   5390: \gdef\restoresf{\relax \ifhmode \spacefactor=\savesfregister \fi}
                   5391: \gdef\anchor#1{\savesf \setref{#1}{Ynothing}\restoresf \ignorespaces}
                   5392:
                   5393: % \setref{NAME}{SNT} defines a cross-reference point NAME, namely
                   5394: % NAME-title, NAME-pg, and NAME-SNT.  Called from \foonoderef.  We have
                   5395: % to set \indexdummies so commands such as @code in a section title
                   5396: % aren't expanded.  It would be nicer not to expand the titles in the
                   5397: % first place, but there's so many layers that that is hard to do.
                   5398: %
                   5399: \def\setref#1#2{{%
                   5400:   \indexdummies
                   5401:   \pdfmkdest{#1}%
                   5402:   \dosetq{#1-title}{Ytitle}%
                   5403:   \dosetq{#1-pg}{Ypagenumber}%
                   5404:   \dosetq{#1-snt}{#2}%
                   5405: }}
                   5406:
                   5407: % @xref, @pxref, and @ref generate cross-references.  For \xrefX, #1 is
                   5408: % the node name, #2 the name of the Info cross-reference, #3 the printed
                   5409: % node name, #4 the name of the Info file, #5 the name of the printed
                   5410: % manual.  All but the node name can be omitted.
                   5411: %
                   5412: \def\pxref#1{\putwordsee{} \xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]}
                   5413: \def\xref#1{\putwordSee{} \xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]}
                   5414: \def\ref#1{\xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]}
                   5415: \def\xrefX[#1,#2,#3,#4,#5,#6]{\begingroup
                   5416:   \unsepspaces
                   5417:   \def\printedmanual{\ignorespaces #5}%
                   5418:   \def\printednodename{\ignorespaces #3}%
                   5419:   \setbox1=\hbox{\printedmanual}%
                   5420:   \setbox0=\hbox{\printednodename}%
                   5421:   \ifdim \wd0 = 0pt
                   5422:     % No printed node name was explicitly given.
                   5423:     \expandafter\ifx\csname SETxref-automatic-section-title\endcsname\relax
                   5424:       % Use the node name inside the square brackets.
                   5425:       \def\printednodename{\ignorespaces #1}%
                   5426:     \else
                   5427:       % Use the actual chapter/section title appear inside
                   5428:       % the square brackets.  Use the real section title if we have it.
                   5429:       \ifdim \wd1 > 0pt
                   5430:         % It is in another manual, so we don't have it.
                   5431:         \def\printednodename{\ignorespaces #1}%
                   5432:       \else
                   5433:         \ifhavexrefs
                   5434:           % We know the real title if we have the xref values.
                   5435:           \def\printednodename{\refx{#1-title}{}}%
                   5436:         \else
                   5437:           % Otherwise just copy the Info node name.
                   5438:           \def\printednodename{\ignorespaces #1}%
                   5439:         \fi%
                   5440:       \fi
                   5441:     \fi
                   5442:   \fi
                   5443:   %
                   5444:   % If we use \unhbox0 and \unhbox1 to print the node names, TeX does not
                   5445:   % insert empty discretionaries after hyphens, which means that it will
                   5446:   % not find a line break at a hyphen in a node names.  Since some manuals
                   5447:   % are best written with fairly long node names, containing hyphens, this
                   5448:   % is a loss.  Therefore, we give the text of the node name again, so it
                   5449:   % is as if TeX is seeing it for the first time.
                   5450:   \ifpdf
                   5451:     \leavevmode
                   5452:     \getfilename{#4}%
                   5453:     \ifnum\filenamelength>0
                   5454:       \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}%
                   5455:         goto file{\the\filename.pdf} name{#1@}%
                   5456:     \else
                   5457:       \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}%
                   5458:         goto name{#1@}%
                   5459:     \fi
                   5460:     \linkcolor
                   5461:   \fi
                   5462:   %
                   5463:   \ifdim \wd1 > 0pt
                   5464:     \putwordsection{} ``\printednodename'' \putwordin{} \cite{\printedmanual}%
                   5465:   \else
                   5466:     % _ (for example) has to be the character _ for the purposes of the
                   5467:     % control sequence corresponding to the node, but it has to expand
                   5468:     % into the usual \leavevmode...\vrule stuff for purposes of
                   5469:     % printing. So we \turnoffactive for the \refx-snt, back on for the
                   5470:     % printing, back off for the \refx-pg.
                   5471:     {\normalturnoffactive
                   5472:      % Only output a following space if the -snt ref is nonempty; for
                   5473:      % @unnumbered and @anchor, it won't be.
                   5474:      \setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces \refx{#1-snt}{}}%
                   5475:      \ifdim \wd2 > 0pt \refx{#1-snt}\space\fi
                   5476:     }%
                   5477:     % [mynode],
                   5478:     [\printednodename],\space
                   5479:     % page 3
                   5480:     \turnoffactive \putwordpage\tie\refx{#1-pg}{}%
                   5481:   \fi
                   5482:   \endlink
                   5483: \endgroup}
                   5484:
                   5485: % \dosetq is the interface for calls from other macros
                   5486:
                   5487: % Use \normalturnoffactive so that punctuation chars such as underscore
                   5488: % and backslash work in node names.  (\turnoffactive doesn't do \.)
                   5489: \def\dosetq#1#2{%
                   5490:   {\let\folio=0%
                   5491:    \normalturnoffactive
                   5492:    \edef\next{\write\auxfile{\internalsetq{#1}{#2}}}%
                   5493:    \iflinks
                   5494:      \next
                   5495:    \fi
                   5496:   }%
                   5497: }
                   5498:
                   5499: % \internalsetq {foo}{page} expands into
                   5500: % CHARACTERS 'xrdef {foo}{...expansion of \Ypage...}
                   5501: % When the aux file is read, ' is the escape character
                   5502:
                   5503: \def\internalsetq #1#2{'xrdef {#1}{\csname #2\endcsname}}
                   5504:
                   5505: % Things to be expanded by \internalsetq
                   5506:
                   5507: \def\Ypagenumber{\folio}
                   5508:
                   5509: \def\Ytitle{\thissection}
                   5510:
                   5511: \def\Ynothing{}
                   5512:
                   5513: \def\Ysectionnumberandtype{%
                   5514: \ifnum\secno=0 \putwordChapter\xreftie\the\chapno %
                   5515: \else \ifnum \subsecno=0 \putwordSection\xreftie\the\chapno.\the\secno %
                   5516: \else \ifnum \subsubsecno=0 %
                   5517: \putwordSection\xreftie\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno %
                   5518: \else %
                   5519: \putwordSection\xreftie\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno %
                   5520: \fi \fi \fi }
                   5521:
                   5522: \def\Yappendixletterandtype{%
                   5523: \ifnum\secno=0 \putwordAppendix\xreftie'char\the\appendixno{}%
                   5524: \else \ifnum \subsecno=0 \putwordSection\xreftie'char\the\appendixno.\the\secno %
                   5525: \else \ifnum \subsubsecno=0 %
                   5526: \putwordSection\xreftie'char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno %
                   5527: \else %
                   5528: \putwordSection\xreftie'char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno %
                   5529: \fi \fi \fi }
                   5530:
                   5531: \gdef\xreftie{'tie}
                   5532:
                   5533: % Use TeX 3.0's \inputlineno to get the line number, for better error
                   5534: % messages, but if we're using an old version of TeX, don't do anything.
                   5535: %
                   5536: \ifx\inputlineno\thisisundefined
                   5537:   \let\linenumber = \empty % Non-3.0.
                   5538: \else
                   5539:   \def\linenumber{\the\inputlineno:\space}
                   5540: \fi
                   5541:
                   5542: % Define \refx{NAME}{SUFFIX} to reference a cross-reference string named NAME.
                   5543: % If its value is nonempty, SUFFIX is output afterward.
                   5544:
                   5545: \def\refx#1#2{%
                   5546:   \expandafter\ifx\csname X#1\endcsname\relax
                   5547:     % If not defined, say something at least.
                   5548:     \angleleft un\-de\-fined\angleright
                   5549:     \iflinks
                   5550:       \ifhavexrefs
                   5551:         \message{\linenumber Undefined cross reference `#1'.}%
                   5552:       \else
                   5553:         \ifwarnedxrefs\else
                   5554:           \global\warnedxrefstrue
                   5555:           \message{Cross reference values unknown; you must run TeX again.}%
                   5556:         \fi
                   5557:       \fi
                   5558:     \fi
                   5559:   \else
                   5560:     % It's defined, so just use it.
                   5561:     \csname X#1\endcsname
                   5562:   \fi
                   5563:   #2% Output the suffix in any case.
                   5564: }
                   5565:
                   5566: % This is the macro invoked by entries in the aux file.
                   5567: %
                   5568: \def\xrdef#1{\begingroup
                   5569:   % Reenable \ as an escape while reading the second argument.
                   5570:   \catcode`\\ = 0
                   5571:   \afterassignment\endgroup
                   5572:   \expandafter\gdef\csname X#1\endcsname
                   5573: }
                   5574:
                   5575: % Read the last existing aux file, if any.  No error if none exists.
                   5576: \def\readauxfile{\begingroup
                   5577:   \catcode`\^^@=\other
                   5578:   \catcode`\^^A=\other
                   5579:   \catcode`\^^B=\other
                   5580:   \catcode`\^^C=\other
                   5581:   \catcode`\^^D=\other
                   5582:   \catcode`\^^E=\other
                   5583:   \catcode`\^^F=\other
                   5584:   \catcode`\^^G=\other
                   5585:   \catcode`\^^H=\other
                   5586:   \catcode`\^^K=\other
                   5587:   \catcode`\^^L=\other
                   5588:   \catcode`\^^N=\other
                   5589:   \catcode`\^^P=\other
                   5590:   \catcode`\^^Q=\other
                   5591:   \catcode`\^^R=\other
                   5592:   \catcode`\^^S=\other
                   5593:   \catcode`\^^T=\other
                   5594:   \catcode`\^^U=\other
                   5595:   \catcode`\^^V=\other
                   5596:   \catcode`\^^W=\other
                   5597:   \catcode`\^^X=\other
                   5598:   \catcode`\^^Z=\other
                   5599:   \catcode`\^^[=\other
                   5600:   \catcode`\^^\=\other
                   5601:   \catcode`\^^]=\other
                   5602:   \catcode`\^^^=\other
                   5603:   \catcode`\^^_=\other
                   5604:   \catcode`\@=\other
                   5605:   \catcode`\^=\other
                   5606:   % It was suggested to define this as 7, which would allow ^^e4 etc.
                   5607:   % in xref tags, i.e., node names.  But since ^^e4 notation isn't
                   5608:   % supported in the main text, it doesn't seem desirable.  Furthermore,
                   5609:   % that is not enough: for node names that actually contain a ^
                   5610:   % character, we would end up writing a line like this: 'xrdef {'hat
                   5611:   % b-title}{'hat b} and \xrdef does a \csname...\endcsname on the first
                   5612:   % argument, and \hat is not an expandable control sequence.  It could
                   5613:   % all be worked out, but why?  Either we support ^^ or we don't.
                   5614:   %
                   5615:   % The other change necessary for this was to define \auxhat:
                   5616:   % \def\auxhat{\def^{'hat }}% extra space so ok if followed by letter
                   5617:   % and then to call \auxhat in \setq.
                   5618:   %
                   5619:   \catcode`\~=\other
                   5620:   \catcode`\[=\other
                   5621:   \catcode`\]=\other
                   5622:   \catcode`\"=\other
                   5623:   \catcode`\_=\other
                   5624:   \catcode`\|=\other
                   5625:   \catcode`\<=\other
                   5626:   \catcode`\>=\other
                   5627:   \catcode`\$=\other
                   5628:   \catcode`\#=\other
                   5629:   \catcode`\&=\other
                   5630:   \catcode`+=\other % avoid \+ for paranoia even though we've turned it off
                   5631:   % Make the characters 128-255 be printing characters
                   5632:   {%
                   5633:     \count 1=128
                   5634:     \def\loop{%
                   5635:       \catcode\count 1=\other
                   5636:       \advance\count 1 by 1
                   5637:       \ifnum \count 1<256 \loop \fi
                   5638:     }%
                   5639:   }%
                   5640:   % The aux file uses ' as the escape (for now).
                   5641:   % Turn off \ as an escape so we do not lose on
                   5642:   % entries which were dumped with control sequences in their names.
                   5643:   % For example, 'xrdef {$\leq $-fun}{page ...} made by @defun ^^
                   5644:   % Reference to such entries still does not work the way one would wish,
                   5645:   % but at least they do not bomb out when the aux file is read in.
                   5646:   \catcode`\{=1
                   5647:   \catcode`\}=2
                   5648:   \catcode`\%=\other
                   5649:   \catcode`\'=0
                   5650:   \catcode`\\=\other
                   5651:   %
                   5652:   \openin 1 \jobname.aux
                   5653:   \ifeof 1 \else
                   5654:     \closein 1
                   5655:     \input \jobname.aux
                   5656:     \global\havexrefstrue
                   5657:     \global\warnedobstrue
                   5658:   \fi
                   5659:   % Open the new aux file.  TeX will close it automatically at exit.
                   5660:   \openout\auxfile=\jobname.aux
                   5661: \endgroup}
                   5662:
                   5663:
                   5664: % Footnotes.
                   5665:
                   5666: \newcount \footnoteno
                   5667:
                   5668: % The trailing space in the following definition for supereject is
                   5669: % vital for proper filling; pages come out unaligned when you do a
                   5670: % pagealignmacro call if that space before the closing brace is
                   5671: % removed. (Generally, numeric constants should always be followed by a
                   5672: % space to prevent strange expansion errors.)
                   5673: \def\supereject{\par\penalty -20000\footnoteno =0 }
                   5674:
                   5675: % @footnotestyle is meaningful for info output only.
                   5676: \let\footnotestyle=\comment
                   5677:
                   5678: \let\ptexfootnote=\footnote
                   5679:
                   5680: {\catcode `\@=11
                   5681: %
                   5682: % Auto-number footnotes.  Otherwise like plain.
                   5683: \gdef\footnote{%
                   5684:   \global\advance\footnoteno by \@ne
                   5685:   \edef\thisfootno{$^{\the\footnoteno}$}%
                   5686:   %
                   5687:   % In case the footnote comes at the end of a sentence, preserve the
                   5688:   % extra spacing after we do the footnote number.
                   5689:   \let\@sf\empty
                   5690:   \ifhmode\edef\@sf{\spacefactor\the\spacefactor}\/\fi
                   5691:   %
                   5692:   % Remove inadvertent blank space before typesetting the footnote number.
                   5693:   \unskip
                   5694:   \thisfootno\@sf
                   5695:   \footnotezzz
                   5696: }%
                   5697:
                   5698: % Don't bother with the trickery in plain.tex to not require the
                   5699: % footnote text as a parameter.  Our footnotes don't need to be so general.
                   5700: %
                   5701: % Oh yes, they do; otherwise, @ifset and anything else that uses
                   5702: % \parseargline fail inside footnotes because the tokens are fixed when
                   5703: % the footnote is read.  --karl, 16nov96.
                   5704: %
                   5705: \long\gdef\footnotezzz{\insert\footins\bgroup
                   5706:   % We want to typeset this text as a normal paragraph, even if the
                   5707:   % footnote reference occurs in (for example) a display environment.
                   5708:   % So reset some parameters.
                   5709:   \interlinepenalty\interfootnotelinepenalty
                   5710:   \splittopskip\ht\strutbox % top baseline for broken footnotes
                   5711:   \splitmaxdepth\dp\strutbox
                   5712:   \floatingpenalty\@MM
                   5713:   \leftskip\z@skip
                   5714:   \rightskip\z@skip
                   5715:   \spaceskip\z@skip
                   5716:   \xspaceskip\z@skip
                   5717:   \parindent\defaultparindent
                   5718:   %
                   5719:   \smallfonts \rm
                   5720:   %
                   5721:   % Hang the footnote text off the number.
                   5722:   \hang
                   5723:   \textindent{\thisfootno}%
                   5724:   %
                   5725:   % Don't crash into the line above the footnote text.  Since this
                   5726:   % expands into a box, it must come within the paragraph, lest it
                   5727:   % provide a place where TeX can split the footnote.
                   5728:   \footstrut
                   5729:   \futurelet\next\fo@t
                   5730: }
                   5731: \def\fo@t{\ifcat\bgroup\noexpand\next \let\next\f@@t
                   5732:   \else\let\next\f@t\fi \next}
                   5733: \def\f@@t{\bgroup\aftergroup\@foot\let\next}
                   5734: \def\f@t#1{#1\@foot}
                   5735: \def\@foot{\strut\par\egroup}
                   5736:
                   5737: }%end \catcode `\@=11
                   5738:
                   5739: % Set the baselineskip to #1, and the lineskip and strut size
                   5740: % correspondingly.  There is no deep meaning behind these magic numbers
                   5741: % used as factors; they just match (closely enough) what Knuth defined.
                   5742: %
                   5743: \def\lineskipfactor{.08333}
                   5744: \def\strutheightpercent{.70833}
                   5745: \def\strutdepthpercent {.29167}
                   5746: %
                   5747: \def\setleading#1{%
                   5748:   \normalbaselineskip = #1\relax
                   5749:   \normallineskip = \lineskipfactor\normalbaselineskip
                   5750:   \normalbaselines
                   5751:   \setbox\strutbox =\hbox{%
                   5752:     \vrule width0pt height\strutheightpercent\baselineskip
                   5753:                     depth \strutdepthpercent \baselineskip
                   5754:   }%
                   5755: }
                   5756:
                   5757: % @| inserts a changebar to the left of the current line.  It should
                   5758: % surround any changed text.  This approach does *not* work if the
                   5759: % change spans more than two lines of output.  To handle that, we would
                   5760: % have adopt a much more difficult approach (putting marks into the main
                   5761: % vertical list for the beginning and end of each change).
                   5762: %
                   5763: \def\|{%
                   5764:   % \vadjust can only be used in horizontal mode.
                   5765:   \leavevmode
                   5766:   %
                   5767:   % Append this vertical mode material after the current line in the output.
                   5768:   \vadjust{%
                   5769:     % We want to insert a rule with the height and depth of the current
                   5770:     % leading; that is exactly what \strutbox is supposed to record.
                   5771:     \vskip-\baselineskip
                   5772:     %
                   5773:     % \vadjust-items are inserted at the left edge of the type.  So
                   5774:     % the \llap here moves out into the left-hand margin.
                   5775:     \llap{%
                   5776:       %
                   5777:       % For a thicker or thinner bar, change the `1pt'.
                   5778:       \vrule height\baselineskip width1pt
                   5779:       %
                   5780:       % This is the space between the bar and the text.
                   5781:       \hskip 12pt
                   5782:     }%
                   5783:   }%
                   5784: }
                   5785:
                   5786: % For a final copy, take out the rectangles
                   5787: % that mark overfull boxes (in case you have decided
                   5788: % that the text looks ok even though it passes the margin).
                   5789: %
                   5790: \def\finalout{\overfullrule=0pt}
                   5791:
                   5792: % @image.  We use the macros from epsf.tex to support this.
                   5793: % If epsf.tex is not installed and @image is used, we complain.
                   5794: %
                   5795: % Check for and read epsf.tex up front.  If we read it only at @image
                   5796: % time, we might be inside a group, and then its definitions would get
                   5797: % undone and the next image would fail.
                   5798: \openin 1 = epsf.tex
                   5799: \ifeof 1 \else
                   5800:   \closein 1
                   5801:   % Do not bother showing banner with post-v2.7 epsf.tex (available in
                   5802:   % doc/epsf.tex until it shows up on ctan).
                   5803:   \def\epsfannounce{\toks0 = }%
                   5804:   \input epsf.tex
                   5805: \fi
                   5806: %
                   5807: % We will only complain once about lack of epsf.tex.
                   5808: \newif\ifwarnednoepsf
                   5809: \newhelp\noepsfhelp{epsf.tex must be installed for images to
                   5810:   work.  It is also included in the Texinfo distribution, or you can get
                   5811:   it from ftp://tug.org/tex/epsf.tex.}
                   5812: %
                   5813: \def\image#1{%
                   5814:   \ifx\epsfbox\undefined
                   5815:     \ifwarnednoepsf \else
                   5816:       \errhelp = \noepsfhelp
                   5817:       \errmessage{epsf.tex not found, images will be ignored}%
                   5818:       \global\warnednoepsftrue
                   5819:     \fi
                   5820:   \else
                   5821:     \imagexxx #1,,,\finish
                   5822:   \fi
                   5823: }
                   5824: %
                   5825: % Arguments to @image:
                   5826: % #1 is (mandatory) image filename; we tack on .eps extension.
                   5827: % #2 is (optional) width, #3 is (optional) height.
                   5828: % #4 is just the usual extra ignored arg for parsing this stuff.
                   5829: \def\imagexxx#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{%
                   5830:   \ifpdf
                   5831:     \centerline{\dopdfimage{#1}{#2}{#3}}%
                   5832:   \else
                   5833:     % \epsfbox itself resets \epsf?size at each figure.
                   5834:     \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfxsize=#2\relax \fi
                   5835:     \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfysize=#3\relax \fi
                   5836:     \begingroup
                   5837:       \catcode`\^^M = 5 % in case we're inside an example
                   5838:       % If the image is by itself, center it.
                   5839:       \ifvmode
                   5840:         \nobreak\bigskip
                   5841:         % Usually we'll have text after the image which will insert
                   5842:         % \parskip glue, so insert it here too to equalize the space
                   5843:         % above and below.
                   5844:         \nobreak\vskip\parskip
                   5845:         \nobreak
                   5846:         \centerline{\epsfbox{#1.eps}}%
                   5847:         \bigbreak
                   5848:       \else
                   5849:         % In the middle of a paragraph, no extra space.
                   5850:         \epsfbox{#1.eps}%
                   5851:       \fi
                   5852:     \endgroup
                   5853:   \fi
                   5854: }
                   5855:
                   5856:
                   5857: \message{localization,}
                   5858: % and i18n.
                   5859:
                   5860: % @documentlanguage is usually given very early, just after
                   5861: % @setfilename.  If done too late, it may not override everything
                   5862: % properly.  Single argument is the language abbreviation.
                   5863: % It would be nice if we could set up a hyphenation file here.
                   5864: %
                   5865: \def\documentlanguage{\parsearg\dodocumentlanguage}
                   5866: \def\dodocumentlanguage#1{%
                   5867:   \tex % read txi-??.tex file in plain TeX.
                   5868:   % Read the file if it exists.
                   5869:   \openin 1 txi-#1.tex
                   5870:   \ifeof1
                   5871:     \errhelp = \nolanghelp
                   5872:     \errmessage{Cannot read language file txi-#1.tex}%
                   5873:     \let\temp = \relax
                   5874:   \else
                   5875:     \def\temp{\input txi-#1.tex }%
                   5876:   \fi
                   5877:   \temp
                   5878:   \endgroup
                   5879: }
                   5880: \newhelp\nolanghelp{The given language definition file cannot be found or
                   5881: is empty.  Maybe you need to install it?  In the current directory
                   5882: should work if nowhere else does.}
                   5883:
                   5884:
                   5885: % @documentencoding should change something in TeX eventually, most
                   5886: % likely, but for now just recognize it.
                   5887: \let\documentencoding = \comment
                   5888:
                   5889:
                   5890: % Page size parameters.
                   5891: %
                   5892: \newdimen\defaultparindent \defaultparindent = 15pt
                   5893:
                   5894: \chapheadingskip = 15pt plus 4pt minus 2pt
                   5895: \secheadingskip = 12pt plus 3pt minus 2pt
                   5896: \subsecheadingskip = 9pt plus 2pt minus 2pt
                   5897:
                   5898: % Prevent underfull vbox error messages.
                   5899: \vbadness = 10000
                   5900:
                   5901: % Don't be so finicky about underfull hboxes, either.
                   5902: \hbadness = 2000
                   5903:
                   5904: % Following George Bush, just get rid of widows and orphans.
                   5905: \widowpenalty=10000
                   5906: \clubpenalty=10000
                   5907:
                   5908: % Use TeX 3.0's \emergencystretch to help line breaking, but if we're
                   5909: % using an old version of TeX, don't do anything.  We want the amount of
                   5910: % stretch added to depend on the line length, hence the dependence on
                   5911: % \hsize.  We call this whenever the paper size is set.
                   5912: %
                   5913: \def\setemergencystretch{%
                   5914:   \ifx\emergencystretch\thisisundefined
                   5915:     % Allow us to assign to \emergencystretch anyway.
                   5916:     \def\emergencystretch{\dimen0}%
                   5917:   \else
                   5918:     \emergencystretch = .15\hsize
                   5919:   \fi
                   5920: }
                   5921:
                   5922: % Parameters in order: 1) textheight; 2) textwidth; 3) voffset;
                   5923: % 4) hoffset; 5) binding offset; 6) topskip.  Then whoever calls us can
                   5924: % set \parskip and call \setleading for \baselineskip.
                   5925: %
                   5926: \def\internalpagesizes#1#2#3#4#5#6{%
                   5927:   \voffset = #3\relax
                   5928:   \topskip = #6\relax
                   5929:   \splittopskip = \topskip
                   5930:   %
                   5931:   \vsize = #1\relax
                   5932:   \advance\vsize by \topskip
                   5933:   \outervsize = \vsize
                   5934:   \advance\outervsize by 2\topandbottommargin
                   5935:   \pageheight = \vsize
                   5936:   %
                   5937:   \hsize = #2\relax
                   5938:   \outerhsize = \hsize
                   5939:   \advance\outerhsize by 0.5in
                   5940:   \pagewidth = \hsize
                   5941:   %
                   5942:   \normaloffset = #4\relax
                   5943:   \bindingoffset = #5\relax
                   5944:   %
                   5945:   \parindent = \defaultparindent
                   5946:   \setemergencystretch
                   5947: }
                   5948:
                   5949: % @letterpaper (the default).
                   5950: \def\letterpaper{{\globaldefs = 1
                   5951:   \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt
                   5952:   \setleading{13.2pt}%
                   5953:   %
                   5954:   % If page is nothing but text, make it come out even.
                   5955:   \internalpagesizes{46\baselineskip}{6in}{\voffset}{.25in}{\bindingoffset}{36pt}%
                   5956: }}
                   5957:
                   5958: % Use @smallbook to reset parameters for 7x9.5 (or so) format.
                   5959: \def\smallbook{{\globaldefs = 1
                   5960:   \parskip = 2pt plus 1pt
                   5961:   \setleading{12pt}%
                   5962:   %
                   5963:   \internalpagesizes{7.5in}{5.in}{\voffset}{.25in}{\bindingoffset}{16pt}%
                   5964:   %
                   5965:   \lispnarrowing = 0.3in
                   5966:   \tolerance = 700
                   5967:   \hfuzz = 1pt
                   5968:   \contentsrightmargin = 0pt
                   5969:   \deftypemargin = 0pt
                   5970:   \defbodyindent = .5cm
                   5971:   %
                   5972:   \let\smalldisplay = \smalldisplayx
                   5973:   \let\smallexample = \smalllispx
                   5974:   \let\smallformat = \smallformatx
                   5975:   \let\smalllisp = \smalllispx
                   5976: }}
                   5977:
                   5978: % Use @afourpaper to print on European A4 paper.
                   5979: \def\afourpaper{{\globaldefs = 1
                   5980:   \setleading{12pt}%
                   5981:   \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt
                   5982:   %
                   5983:   \internalpagesizes{53\baselineskip}{160mm}{\voffset}{4mm}{\bindingoffset}{44pt}%
                   5984:   %
                   5985:   \tolerance = 700
                   5986:   \hfuzz = 1pt
                   5987: }}
                   5988:
                   5989: % A specific text layout, 24x15cm overall, intended for A4 paper.  Top margin
                   5990: % 29mm, hence bottom margin 28mm, nominal side margin 3cm.
                   5991: \def\afourlatex{{\globaldefs = 1
                   5992:   \setleading{13.6pt}%
                   5993:   %
                   5994:   \afourpaper
                   5995:   \internalpagesizes{237mm}{150mm}{3.6mm}{3.6mm}{3mm}{7mm}%
                   5996:   %
                   5997:   \globaldefs = 0
                   5998: }}
                   5999:
                   6000: % Use @afourwide to print on European A4 paper in wide format.
                   6001: \def\afourwide{%
                   6002:   \afourpaper
                   6003:   \internalpagesizes{9.5in}{6.5in}{\hoffset}{\normaloffset}{\bindingoffset}{7mm}%
                   6004:   %
                   6005:   \globaldefs = 0
                   6006: }
                   6007:
                   6008: % @pagesizes TEXTHEIGHT[,TEXTWIDTH]
                   6009: % Perhaps we should allow setting the margins, \topskip, \parskip,
                   6010: % and/or leading, also. Or perhaps we should compute them somehow.
                   6011: %
                   6012: \def\pagesizes{\parsearg\pagesizesxxx}
                   6013: \def\pagesizesxxx#1{\pagesizesyyy #1,,\finish}
                   6014: \def\pagesizesyyy#1,#2,#3\finish{{%
                   6015:   \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \hsize=#2\relax \fi
                   6016:   \globaldefs = 1
                   6017:   %
                   6018:   \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt
                   6019:   \setleading{13.2pt}%
                   6020:   %
                   6021:   \internalpagesizes{#1}{\hsize}{\voffset}{\normaloffset}{\bindingoffset}{44pt}%
                   6022: }}
                   6023:
                   6024: % Set default to letter.
                   6025: %
                   6026: \letterpaper
                   6027:
                   6028:
                   6029: \message{and turning on texinfo input format.}
                   6030:
                   6031: % Define macros to output various characters with catcode for normal text.
                   6032: \catcode`\"=\other
                   6033: \catcode`\~=\other
                   6034: \catcode`\^=\other
                   6035: \catcode`\_=\other
                   6036: \catcode`\|=\other
                   6037: \catcode`\<=\other
                   6038: \catcode`\>=\other
                   6039: \catcode`\+=\other
                   6040: \catcode`\$=\other
                   6041: \def\normaldoublequote{"}
                   6042: \def\normaltilde{~}
                   6043: \def\normalcaret{^}
                   6044: \def\normalunderscore{_}
                   6045: \def\normalverticalbar{|}
                   6046: \def\normalless{<}
                   6047: \def\normalgreater{>}
                   6048: \def\normalplus{+}
                   6049: \def\normaldollar{$}
                   6050:
                   6051: % This macro is used to make a character print one way in ttfont
                   6052: % where it can probably just be output, and another way in other fonts,
                   6053: % where something hairier probably needs to be done.
                   6054: %
                   6055: % #1 is what to print if we are indeed using \tt; #2 is what to print
                   6056: % otherwise.  Since all the Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero
                   6057: % interword stretch (and shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all
                   6058: % typewriter fonts to have this, we can check that font parameter.
                   6059: %
                   6060: \def\ifusingtt#1#2{\ifdim \fontdimen3\font=0pt #1\else #2\fi}
                   6061:
                   6062: % Same as above, but check for italic font.  Actually this also catches
                   6063: % non-italic slanted fonts since it is impossible to distinguish them from
                   6064: % italic fonts.  But since this is only used by $ and it uses \sl anyway
                   6065: % this is not a problem.
                   6066: \def\ifusingit#1#2{\ifdim \fontdimen1\font>0pt #1\else #2\fi}
                   6067:
                   6068: % Turn off all special characters except @
                   6069: % (and those which the user can use as if they were ordinary).
                   6070: % Most of these we simply print from the \tt font, but for some, we can
                   6071: % use math or other variants that look better in normal text.
                   6072:
                   6073: \catcode`\"=\active
                   6074: \def\activedoublequote{{\tt\char34}}
                   6075: \let"=\activedoublequote
                   6076: \catcode`\~=\active
                   6077: \def~{{\tt\char126}}
                   6078: \chardef\hat=`\^
                   6079: \catcode`\^=\active
                   6080: \def^{{\tt \hat}}
                   6081:
                   6082: \catcode`\_=\active
                   6083: \def_{\ifusingtt\normalunderscore\_}
                   6084: % Subroutine for the previous macro.
                   6085: \def\_{\leavevmode \kern.06em \vbox{\hrule width.3em height.1ex}}
                   6086:
                   6087: \catcode`\|=\active
                   6088: \def|{{\tt\char124}}
                   6089: \chardef \less=`\<
                   6090: \catcode`\<=\active
                   6091: \def<{{\tt \less}}
                   6092: \chardef \gtr=`\>
                   6093: \catcode`\>=\active
                   6094: \def>{{\tt \gtr}}
                   6095: \catcode`\+=\active
                   6096: \def+{{\tt \char 43}}
                   6097: \catcode`\$=\active
                   6098: \def${\ifusingit{{\sl\$}}\normaldollar}
                   6099: %\catcode 27=\active
                   6100: %\def^^[{$\diamondsuit$}
                   6101:
                   6102: % Set up an active definition for =, but don't enable it most of the time.
                   6103: {\catcode`\==\active
                   6104: \global\def={{\tt \char 61}}}
                   6105:
                   6106: \catcode`+=\active
                   6107: \catcode`\_=\active
                   6108:
                   6109: % If a .fmt file is being used, characters that might appear in a file
                   6110: % name cannot be active until we have parsed the command line.
                   6111: % So turn them off again, and have \everyjob (or @setfilename) turn them on.
                   6112: % \otherifyactive is called near the end of this file.
                   6113: \def\otherifyactive{\catcode`+=\other \catcode`\_=\other}
                   6114:
                   6115: \catcode`\@=0
                   6116:
                   6117: % \rawbackslashxx output one backslash character in current font
                   6118: \global\chardef\rawbackslashxx=`\\
                   6119: %{\catcode`\\=\other
                   6120: %@gdef@rawbackslashxx{\}}
                   6121:
                   6122: % \rawbackslash redefines \ as input to do \rawbackslashxx.
                   6123: {\catcode`\\=\active
                   6124: @gdef@rawbackslash{@let\=@rawbackslashxx }}
                   6125:
                   6126: % \normalbackslash outputs one backslash in fixed width font.
                   6127: \def\normalbackslash{{\tt\rawbackslashxx}}
                   6128:
                   6129: % \catcode 17=0   % Define control-q
                   6130: \catcode`\\=\active
                   6131:
                   6132: % Used sometimes to turn off (effectively) the active characters
                   6133: % even after parsing them.
                   6134: @def@turnoffactive{@let"=@normaldoublequote
                   6135: @let\=@realbackslash
                   6136: @let~=@normaltilde
                   6137: @let^=@normalcaret
                   6138: @let_=@normalunderscore
                   6139: @let|=@normalverticalbar
                   6140: @let<=@normalless
                   6141: @let>=@normalgreater
                   6142: @let+=@normalplus
                   6143: @let$=@normaldollar}
                   6144:
                   6145: @def@normalturnoffactive{@let"=@normaldoublequote
                   6146: @let\=@normalbackslash
                   6147: @let~=@normaltilde
                   6148: @let^=@normalcaret
                   6149: @let_=@normalunderscore
                   6150: @let|=@normalverticalbar
                   6151: @let<=@normalless
                   6152: @let>=@normalgreater
                   6153: @let+=@normalplus
                   6154: @let$=@normaldollar}
                   6155:
                   6156: % Make _ and + \other characters, temporarily.
                   6157: % This is canceled by @fixbackslash.
                   6158: @otherifyactive
                   6159:
                   6160: % If a .fmt file is being used, we don't want the `\input texinfo' to show up.
                   6161: % That is what \eatinput is for; after that, the `\' should revert to printing
                   6162: % a backslash.
                   6163: %
                   6164: @gdef@eatinput input texinfo{@fixbackslash}
                   6165: @global@let\ = @eatinput
                   6166:
                   6167: % On the other hand, perhaps the file did not have a `\input texinfo'. Then
                   6168: % the first `\{ in the file would cause an error. This macro tries to fix
                   6169: % that, assuming it is called before the first `\' could plausibly occur.
                   6170: % Also back turn on active characters that might appear in the input
                   6171: % file name, in case not using a pre-dumped format.
                   6172: %
                   6173: @gdef@fixbackslash{%
                   6174:   @ifx\@eatinput @let\ = @normalbackslash @fi
                   6175:   @catcode`+=@active
                   6176:   @catcode`@_=@active
                   6177: }
                   6178:
                   6179: % Say @foo, not \foo, in error messages.
                   6180: @escapechar = `@@
                   6181:
                   6182: % These look ok in all fonts, so just make them not special.
                   6183: @catcode`@& = @other
                   6184: @catcode`@# = @other
                   6185: @catcode`@% = @other
                   6186:
                   6187: @c Set initial fonts.
                   6188: @textfonts
                   6189: @rm
                   6190:
                   6191:
                   6192: @c Local variables:
                   6193: @c eval: (add-hook 'write-file-hooks 'time-stamp)
                   6194: @c page-delimiter: "^\\\\message"
                   6195: @c time-stamp-start: "def\\\\texinfoversion{"
                   6196: @c time-stamp-format: "%:y-%02m-%02d.%02H"
                   6197: @c time-stamp-end: "}"
                   6198: @c End:

FreeBSD-CVSweb <freebsd-cvsweb@FreeBSD.org>